1996 Toyota Land Cruiser EWD

Brought to you by BirfMark

A INTRODUCTION
This manual consists of the following 11 sections:
No. Section Description
INDEX Index of the contents of this manual.

A
INTRODUCTION Brief explanation of each section.
HOW TO USE THIS

B Instructions on how to use this manual.
MANUAL
TROUBLE-
C Describes the basic inspection procedures for electrical circuits.
SHOOTING
D ABBREVIATIONS Defines the abbreviations used in this manual.
GLOSSARY OF
E TERMS AND Defines the symbols and functions of major parts.
SYMBOLS
Shows position of the Electronic Control Unit, Relays, Relay Block, etc.
F RELAY LOCATIONS
This section is closely related to the system circuit.
ELECTRICAL Describes position of Parts Connectors, Splice points, Ground points, etc.
G
WIRING ROUTING This section is closely related to the system circuit.
POWER SOURCE Describes power distribution from the power supply to various electrical
H
(Current Flow Chart) loads.
INDEX Index of the system circuits.
Electrical circuits of each system are shown from the power supply through
I ground points. Wiring connections and their positions are shown and
classified by code according to the connection method. (Refer to the
SYSTEM CIRCUITS section, “How to use this manual”).
The “System Outline” and “Service Hints” useful for troubleshooting are also
contained in this section.
J GROUND POINTS Shows ground positions of all the parts decribed in this manual.
OVERALL
K ELECTRICAL Provides circuit diagrams showing the circuit connections.
WIRING DIAGRAM
2
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B
This manual provides information on the electrical circuits installed on vehicles by

dividing them into a circuit for each system.
The actual wiring of each system circuit is shown from the point where the power
source is received from the battery as far as each ground point. (All circuit diagrams
are shown with the switches in the OFF position.)
When troubleshooting any problem, first understand the operation of the circuit where
the problem was detected (see System Circuit section), the power source supplying
power to that circuit (see Power Source section), and the ground points (see Ground
Points section). See the System Outline to understand the circuit operation.
When the circuit operation is understood, begin troubleshooting of the problem circuit
to isolate the cause. Use Relay Location and Electrical Wiring Routing sections to find
each part, junction block and wiring harness connectors, wiring harness and wiring
harness connectors, splice points, and ground points of each system circuit. Internal
wiring for each junction block is also provided for better understanding of connection
within a junction block.
Wiring related to each system is indicated in each system circuit by arrows (from
,to ). When overall connections are required, see the Overall Electrical Wiring
Diagram at the end of this manual.
3
B HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

* The system shown here is an EXAMPLE ONLY. It is different to the
actual circuit shown in the SYSTEM CIRCUITS SECTION.
4
A : System Title J : Indicates the wiring color.

: Indicates a Relay Block. No shading is used and only Wire colors are indicated by an alphabetical code.
B the Relay Block No. is shown to distinguish it from the
J/B. B = Black L = Blue R = Red
Example: Indicates Relay Block No. 1. BR = Brown LG = Light Green V = Violet
: Indicates the connector to be connected to a part (the G = Green O = Orange W = White

C
numeral indicates the pin No.) GR = Gray P = Pink Y = Yellow
Explanation of pin use. The first letter indicates the basic wire color and the
second letter indicates the color of the stripe.
Example: L-Y
(Blue) (Yellow)
K : Indicates a wiring Splice Point (Codes are “E” for the

The pins shown are only for the highest grade, or only
Engine Room, “I” for the Instrument Panel, and “B” for
include those in the specification. the Body).
D : Connector Color Example:
Connectors not indicated are milky white in color.
E : ( ) is used to indicate different wiring and connector,
etc. when the vehicle model, engine type, or
specification is different.
F : Indicates related system.
G : Indicates the wiring harness and wiring harness

connector. The wiring harness with male terminal is
shown with arrows ( ).
The Location of Splice Point I 5 is indicated by the
Outside numerals are pin numbers. shaded section.
L : Page No.
M : Indicates a shielded cable.
The first letter of the code for each wiring harness and N : Indicates a ground point.
wiring harness connector(s) indicates the component’s
location, e.g., “E” for the Engine Compartment, “I” for the The first letter of the code for each ground point(s)
Instrument Panel and Surrounding area, and “B” for the indicates the component’s location, e.g., “E” for the
Body and Surrounding area. Engine Compartment, “I” for the Instrument Panel and
Surrounding area, and “B” for the Body and
When more than one code has the first and second Surrounding area.
letters in common, followed by numbers (e.g., IH1, IH2),
this indicates the same type of wiring harness and O : Indicates the pin number of the connector.
wiring harness connector.
The numbering system is different for female and male
H : Represents a part (all parts are shown in sky blue). The connectors.
code is the same as the code used in parts position.
Example: Numbered in order Numbered in order
I : Junction Block (The number in the circle is the J/B No. from upper left to from upper right to
and the connector code is shown beside it). Junction lower right lower left
Blocks are shaded to clearly separate them from other
parts (different junction blocks are shaded differently for
further clarification).
Example:
3B indicates
that it is inside P : When 2 parts both use one connector in common, the
Junction Block parts connector name used in the wire routing section
No. 3. is shown in square brackets [ ].
5
Q SYSTEM OUTLINE
WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS TO TERMINAL 3 OF THE POWER W NDOW MASTER SW, TERMINAL 2 OF THE POWER W NDOW CONTROL
RELAY AND TERMINAL 8 OF THE POWER WINDOW SW THROUGH THE DOOR FUSE.
1. DRIVER’S WINDOW “MANUAL UP” OPERATION BY MASTER SW
HOLDING MANUAL SW (DRIVER’S) ON “UP” POSITION LOCATED N POWER W NDOW MASTER SW, THE CURRENT FLOWS TO TERMINAL 5 OF THE POWER W NDOW
CONTROL RELAY THROUGH TERMINAL 3 OF THE MASTER SW TERMINAL 2 TO OPERATE A POWER W NDOW CONTROL RELAY. THUS THE CURRENT INSIDE THE RELAY
FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 2 OF THE RELAY TERMINAL 1 TERMINAL 2 OF THE POWER WINDOW MOTOR TERMINAL 1 TERMINAL 4 OF THE RELAY TERMINAL
3 TO GROUND. THE MOTOR TURNS TO ASCENT THE WINDOW. RELEASING THIS SW, THE ROTATION OF MOTOR IS STOPPED AND THE W NDOWS CAN STOP AT WILL
POINT.
(FOR THE “MANUAL DOWN” OPERATION, CURRENT FLOWS IN THE REVERSE DIRECTION BECAUSE THE TERMINALS WHERE IT FLOW ARE CHANGED).
2. DRIVER’S WINDOW “AUTO DOWN” OPERATION BY MASTER SW
ONCE THE “AUTO DOWN” BUTTON OF THE MASTER SW IS PUSHED, THE CURRENT FLOW TERMINAL 9 OF THE POWER WINDOW CONTROL RELAY THROUGH TERMINAL
3 OF THE MASTER SW TERMINALS 8 AND 9 TO OPERATE THE RELAY. THUS THE CURRENT NSIDE THE POWER WINDOW CONTROL RELAY FLOWS FROM TERMINAL
2 OF THE RELAY TERMINAL 4 TERMINAL 1 OF THE POWER W NDOW MOTOR TERMINAL 2 TERMINAL 1 OF THE RELAY TERMINAL 3 TO GROUND.
THE MOTOR CONTINUES THE ROTATION ENABLING TO DESCENT THE W NDOW.
THE W NDOW DESCENDS TO THE END POSITION. THE CURRENT WILL BE CUT OFF TO RELEASE THE AUTO DOWN FUNCTION BASED ON THE INCREASING CURRENT
BETWEEN TERMINAL 2 OF THE RELAY AND TERMINAL 1 N RELAY.
3. DRIVER’S WINDOW AUTO DOWN RELEASE OPERATION BY MASTER SW
HOLDING THE MANUAL SW (DRIVER’S) ON “UP” POSITION N OPERAT NG AUTO DOWN. THE CURRENT FROM TERMINAL 3 OF THE MASTER SW PASS NG TERMINAL 2
FLOWS TERMINAL 5 OF THE RELAY AND RELEASES THE AUTO DOWN FUNCTION N THE POWER WINDOW CONTROL RELAY. RELEASING THE HAND FROM SW, WINDOW
STOPS AND CONT NUING ON TOUCHING SW, THE FUNCTION SWITCHES TO MANUAL UP OPERATION.
4. PASSENGER’S WINDOW UP OPERATION (MASTER SW) AND WINDOW LOCK SW OPERATION
HOLDING PASSENGER’S WINDOW SW (MASTER SW) ON “UP”, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 3 OF THE MASTER SW PASSING TERMINAL 6 TO TERMINAL 3 OF
THE POWER WINDOW SW (PASSENGER’S) TERMINAL 4 TERMINAL 2 OF THE MOTOR TERMINAL 1 TERMINAL 9 OF THE POWER W NDOW SW TERMINAL
7 TERMINAL 1 OF THE MASTER SW TERMINAL 4 TO GROUND. THE MOTOR RUNS TO ASCENT THE W NDOW. RELEASING THIS SW, THE ROTATION OF MOTOR
IS STOPPED AND WINDOW CAN STOP AT WILL PLACE.
SWITCHING THE W NDOW LOCK SW IN “LOCK” POSITION, THE CIRCUIT IS OPENED AND STOPPED THE MOTOR ROTATION.
(FOR THE DOWN OPERATION, CURRENT FLOWS IN THE REVERSE D RECTION BECAUSE THE TERMINALS WHERE IT FLOWS ARE CHANGED).
R
SERVICE HINTS
P 2 POWER WINDOW CONTROL RELAY
3-GROUND: ALWAYS CONTINUITY
2-GROUND: APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION
5-GROUND: APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION AND THE MASTER SW AT UP POSITION
8-GROUND: APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION AND THE MASTER SW AT AUTO DOWN POSITION
9-GROUND: APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION AND THE MASTER SW AT DOWN OR AUTO DOWN POSITION
P 4 POWER WINDOW MASTER SW
4-GROUND: ALWAYS CONTINUITY
3-GROUND: APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION
WINDOW LOCK SW
OPEN WITH THE WINDOW LOCK SW AT LOCK POSITION
S
: PARTS LOCATION
CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE CODE SEE PAGE
P2 21 P4 21 P6 21
P3 21 P5 21
T
: RELAY BLOCKS
CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCK (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)
1 16 R/B NO. 1 ( NSTRUMENT PANEL LEFT)
U
: JUNCTION BLOCK AND WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR
CODE SEE PAGE JUNCTION BLOCK AND W RE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)
3B 14 J/B NO. 3 AND COWL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL LEFT S DE)
V : CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)
ID1 26 FRONT DOOR RH W RE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)
IH1 26 FRONT DOOR LH W RE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)
W : GROUND POINTS
CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINT LOCATION

IC 24 COWL LEFT
X
: SPLICE POINTS
CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE W RE HARNESS WITH SPLICE PO NTS
I5 24 COWL WIRE
6
Q : Explains the system outline.
R : Indicates values or explains the function for reference during troubleshooting.
S : Indicates the reference page showing the position on the vehicle of the parts in the system circuit.
Example: Part “P 4” (Power Window Master SW) is on page 21 of the manual.
* The letter in the code is from the first letter of the part, and the number indicates its order
in parts starting with the letter.
Example: P 4
Part is 4th in order
Power Window Master SW
T : Indicates the reference page showing the position on the vehicle of Relay Block Connectors in the
system circuit.
Example: Connector “1” is described on page 16 of this manual and is installed on the left side of the
instrument panel.
U : Indicates the reference page showing the position on the vehicle of J/B and Wire Harness in the system
circuit.
Example: Connector “3B”connects the Cowl Wire and J/B No. 3. It is described on page 14 of this
manual, and is installed on the instrument panel left side.
V : Indicates the reference page describing the wiring harness and wiring harness connector (the female
wiring harness is shown first, followed by the male wiring harness).
Example: Connector “ID1”connects the front door RH wire (female) and cowl wire (male). It is described
on page 26 of this manual, and is installed on the right side kick panel.
W : Indicates the reference page showing the position of the ground points on the vehicle.
Example: Ground point “IC” is described on page 24 of this manual and is installed on the cowl left side.
X : Indicates the reference page showing the position of the splice points on the vehicle.
Example: Splice point “I 5” is on the Cowl Wire Harness and is described on page 24 of this manual.
HINT:
Junction connector (code: J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, J7, J8,
J9) in this manual include a short terminal which is
connected to a number of wire harnesses. Always
perform inspection with the short terminal installed.
(When installing the wire harnesses, the harnesses
can be connected to any position within the short
terminal grouping. Accordingly, in other vehicles, the
same position in the short terminal may be connected
to a wire harness from a different part.)
Wire harness sharing the same short terminal
grouping have the same color.
7
The “Current Flow Chart” section, describes which parts each power source (fuses, fusible links, and circuit breakers)
transmits current to. In the Power Source circuit diagram, the conditions when battery power is supplied to each system are
explained. Since all System Circuit diagrams start from the power source, the power source system must be fully understood.
H POWER SOURCE (Current Flow Chart)
The chart below shows the route by which current flows from the battery to each electrical source (Fusible Link, Circuit
Breaker, Fuse, etc.) and other parts.
The next page and following pages show the parts to which each electrical source outputs current.
POWER SOURCE
8 * The system shown here is an EXAMPLE ONLY. It is different to the actual circuit shown in the SYSTEM CIRCUITS SECTION.
B
The ground points circuit diagram shows the connections from all major parts to the respective ground points. When
troubleshooting a faulty ground point, checking the system circuits which use a common ground may help you identify the
problem ground quickly. The relationship between ground points ( , , and shown below) can also be
checked this way.
J GROUND POINT
* The system shown here is an EXAMPLE ONLY. It is different to the actual circuit shown in the SYSTEM CIRCUITS SECTION. 9
C TROUBLESHOOTING
VOLTAGE CHECK
(a) Establish conditions in which voltage is present at the
check point.
Example:
- Ignition SW on
- Ignition SW and SW 1 on
- Ignition SW, SW 1 and Relay on (SW2 off)
(b) Using a voltmeter, connect the negative lead to a good
ground point or negative battery terminal, and the
positive lead to the connector or component terminal.
This check can be done with a test light instead of a
voltmeter.
CONTINUITY AND RESISTANCE CHECK

(a) Disconnect the battery terminal or wire so there is no
voltage between the check points.
(b) Contact the two leads of an ohmmeter to each of the
check points.
If the circuit has diodes, reverse the two leads and check
again.
When contacting the negative lead to the diode positive side
and the positive lead to the negative side, there should be
continuity.
When contacting the two leads in reverse, there should be no
continuity.
(c) Use the volt/ohmmeter with high impedance (10 kΩ/V

minimum) for troubleshooting of the electrical circuit.
10
FINDING A SHORT CIRCUIT

(a) Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads of the
fuse.
(b) Connect a test light in place of the fuse.
(c) Establish conditions in which the test light comes on.
Example:
- Ignition SW on
- Ignition SW and SW 1 on
- Ignition SW, SW 1 and Relay on (Connect the
Relay) and SW 2 off (or Disconnect SW 2)
(d) Disconnect and reconnect the connectors while
watching the test light.
The short lies between the connector where the test
light stays lit and the connector where the light goes
out.
(e) Find the exact location of the short by lightly shaking
the problem wire along the body.
CAUTION:
(a) Do not open the cover or the case of the ECU unless
absolutely necessary. (If the IC terminals are
touched, the IC may be destroyed by static
electricity.)
(b) When replacing the internal mechanism (ECU part)
of the digital meter, be careful that no part of your
body or clothing comes in contact with the
terminals of leads from the IC, etc. of the
replacement part (spare part).
DISCONNECTION OF MALE AND FEMALE

CONNECTORS
To pull apart the connectors, pull on the connector itself, not the
wire harness.
HINT: Check to see what kind of connector you are disconnecting
before pulling apart.
11
C TROUBLESHOOTING
HOW TO REPLACE TERMINAL

(with terminal retainer or secondary locking
device)
1. PREPARE THE SPECIAL TOOL
HINT: To remove the terminal from the connector, please
construct and use the special tool or like object shown
on the left.
2. DISCONNECT CONNECTOR
3. DISENGAGE THE SECONDARY LOCKING DEVICE OR
TERMINAL RETAINER
(a) Locking device must be disengaged before the
terminal locking clip can be released and the terminal
removed from the connector.
(b) Use a special tool or the terminal pick to unlock the
secondary locking device or terminal retainer.
NOTICE:
Do not remove the terminal retainer from connector
body.
For Non-Waterproof Type Connector

HINT: The needle insertion position varies according
to the connector’s shape (number of terminals
etc.), so check the position before inserting it.
“Case 1”
Raise the terminal retainer up to the temporary
lock position.
“Case 2”
Open the secondary locking device.
12
For Waterproof Type Connector

HINT: Terminal retainer color is different
according to connector body.
Example:
Terminal Retainer: Connector Body
Black or White : Gray
Black or White : Dark Gray
Gray or White : Black
“Case 1”
Type where terminal retainer is pulled up
to the temporary lock position (Pull Type).
Insert the special tool into the terminal
retainer access hole ( Mark) and pull the
terminal retainer up to the temporary lock
position.
HINT: The needle insertion position varies
according to the connector’s shape
(number of terminals, etc.), so check the
position before inserting it.
“Case 2”
Type which cannot be pulled as far as
Power Lock insert the tool straight into the
access hole of terminal retainer as shown.
13
C TROUBLESHOOTING
Push the terminal retainer down to the temporary lock
position.
(c) Release the locking lug from terminal and pull the
terminal out from rear.
4. INSTALL TERMINAL TO CONNECTOR

(a) Insert the terminal.
HINT:
1. Make sure the terminal is positioned correctly.
2. Insert the terminal until the locking lug locks firmly.
3. Insert the terminal with terminal retainer in the
temporary lock position.
(b) Push the secondary locking device or terminal retainer

into the full lock position.
5. CONNECT CONNECTOR
14
ABBREVIATIONS D
ABBREVIATIONS
The following abbreviations are used in this manual.
ABS = Anti-Lock Brake System
A/C = Air Conditioning
A/T = Automatic Transmission
CD = Compact Disc
COMB. = Combination
DIFF. = Differential
ECU = Electronic Control Unit
EGR = Exhaust Gas Recirculation
ESA = Electronic Spark Advance
FL = Fusible Link
LH = Left-Hand
O/D = Overdrive
R/B = Relay Block
RH = Right-Hand
SFI = Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection
SRS = Supplemental Restraint System
SW = Switch
TEMP. = Temperature
VSV = Vacuum Switching Valve
W/ = With
W/O = Without
* The titles given inside the components are the names of the terminals (terminal codes) and are not
treated as being abbreviations.
15
E GLOSSARY OF TERMS AND SYMBOLS
BATTERY GROUND
Stores chemical energy and The point at which wiring attaches
converts it into electrical energy. to the Body, thereby providing a
Provides DC current for the auto’s return path for an electrical circuit;
various electrical circuits. without a ground, current cannot
flow.
CAPACITOR (Condenser) HEADLIGHTS Current flow causes a headlight
A small holding unit for temporary 1. SINGLE filament to heat up and emit light.
storage of electrical voltage. FILAMENT A headlight may have either a
single (1) filament or a double (2)
CIGARETTE LIGHTER filament.
An electric resistance heating 2. DOUBLE
element. FILAMENT
CIRCUIT BREAKER HORN

Basically a reusable fuse, a circuit An electric device which sounds a
breaker will heat and open if too loud audible signal.
much current flows through it. Some
units automatically reset when cool,
others must be manually reset.
DIODE IGNITION COIL

A semiconductor which allows Convert low-voltage DC current
current flow in only one direction. into high-voltage ingition current
for firing the spark plugs.
DIODE, ZENER LIGHT

A diode which allows current flow Current flow through a filament
in one direction but blocks reverse causes the filament to heat up
flow only up to a specific voltage. and emit light.
Above that potential, it passes the
excess voltage. This acts as a
simple voltage regulator.
PHOTODIODE LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE)

The photodiode is a semiconductor Upon current flow, these diodes
which controls the current flow emit light without producing the
according to the amount of light. heat of a comparable light.
DISTRIBUTOR, IIA METER, ANALOG

Channels high-voltage current Current flow activates a magnetic
from the ignition coil to the coil which causes a needle to
individual spark plugs. move, thereby providing a relative
display against a background
calibration.
FUSE METER, DIGITAL
A thin metal strip which burns Current flow activates one or
through when too much current many LED’s, LCD’s, or fluorescent
FUEL
flows through it, thereby stopping displays, which provide a relative
current flow and protecting a or digital display.
circuit from damage.
FUSIBLE LINK
(for Medium Current Fuse) MOTOR
A heavy-gauge wire placed in
high amperage circuits which A power unit which converts
burns through on overloads, M electrical energy into mechanical
thereby protecting the circuit. energy, especially rotary motion.
(for High Current Fuse or
Fusible Link.) The numbers indicate the cross-
16 section surface area of the wires.

RELAY Basically, an electrically SPEAKER

operated switch which may An electromechanical device
1. NORMALLY be normally closed (1) or
CLOSED which creates sound waves from
open (2). current flow.
Current flow through a
small coil creates a
2. NORMALLY magnetic field which either
OPEN opens or closes an SWITCH, MANUAL
attached switch.
Opens and
1. NORMALLY closes circuits,
OPEN thereby
RELAY, DOUBLE THROW stopping (1) or
allowing (2)
A relay which passes current 2. NORMALLY current flow.
through one set of contacts or the CLOSED
other.
RESISTOR SWITCH, DOUBLE THROW

An electrical component with a A switch which continuously
fixed resistance, placed in a circuit passes current through one set
to reduce voltage to a specific of contacts or the other.
value.
RESISTOR, TAPPED SWITCH,

A resistor which supplies two or IGNITION
more different non adjustable A key operated switch with
resistance values. several positions which allows
various circuits, particularly the
RESISTOR, VARIABLE OR primary ignition circuit, to
RHEOSTAT become operational.
A controllable resistor with a
variable rate of resistance.
Also called a potentiometer or
rheostat.
SENSOR (Thermistor) SWITCH, WIPER PARK

A resistor which varies its Automatically returns wipers to
resistance with temperature. the stop position when the wiper
switch is turned off.
SENSOR, SPEED TRANSISTOR

Uses magnetic impulses to open A solid state device typically used
and close a switch to create a as an electronic relay; stops or
signal for activation of other passes current depending on the
components. voltage applied at “base.”
SHORT PIN WIRES

Used to provide an unbroken (1) NOT Wires are always
connection within a juction block. CONNECTED drawn as straight lines
on wiring diagrams.
Crossed wires (1)
without a black dot at
the junction are not
SOLENOID joined; crossed wires
An electromagnetic coil which (2) with a black dot or
forms a magnetic field when octagonal ( ) mark at
current flows, to move a plunger, (2) SPLICED the juction as spliced
etc. (joined) connections.
17
F RELAY LOCATIONS
[Engine Compartment]
2 : R/B No. 2 Front Side of Left Fender
18
F
[Instrument Panel]
[Body]
19
F RELAY LOCATIONS
1 : R/B No. 1 Left Kick Panel (See Page 19)
Fuse Block Instrument Panel Left (See Page 19)
20
MEMO
21
G ELECTRICAL WIRING ROUTING

Position of Parts in Engine Compartment
A 1 A/C Magnetic Clutch F 1 Front Turn Signal Light LH

A 2 A/C Dual Pressure SW F 2 Front Turn Signal Light RH
A 3 A/T Fluid Temp. Sensor F 3 Front Wiper Motor
A 4 ABS Actuator F 4 Fuel Pump Relay
A 5 ABS Actuator F 5 Fuel Pump Resistor
A 6 ABS Relay F 6 Fusible Link (AM1)
A 7 ABS Relay F 7 Fusible Link (AM2)
A 8 Auto Antenna Motor F 8 Fusible Link (Main)
B 1 Brake Fluid Level Warning SW G 1 Generator

G 2 Generator
C 1 Center Diff. Lock Control Motor
C 2 Center Diff. Lock Indicator SW H 1 Headlight Hi LH
C 3 Crankshaft Position Sensor H 2 Headlight Hi RH
C 4 Cruise Control Actuator H 3 Headlight Lo LH
H 4 Headlight Lo RH
D 1 Data Link Connector 1 H 5 Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
D 2 Distributor H 6 Heated Oxygen Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
H 7 Horn LH
E 1 EGR Gas Temp. Sensor H 8 Horn RH
E 2 Electronically Controlled Transmission Solenoid
E 3 Engine Coolant Temp. Sensor
22
G
Position of Parts in Engine Compartment
I 1 Idle Air Control Valve P 1 Park/Neutral Position SW

I 2 Igniter P 2 Parking Light LH
I 3 Ignition Coil P 3 Parking Light RH
I 4 Injector No. 1
I 5 Injector No. 2 S 1 Starter
I 6 Injector No. 3 S 2 Starter
I 7 Injector No. 4
I 8 Injector No. 5 T 1 Throttle Position Sensor
I 9 Injector No. 6 T 2 Transfer L4 Position SW
T 3 Transfer Neutral Position SW
K 1 Knock Sensor 1
K 2 Knock Sensor 2 V 1 Vehicle Speed Sensor (Combination Meter)
V 2 Vehicle Speed Sensor (Electronically Controlled
M 1 Mass Air Flow Transmission)
V 3 VSV (EGR)
N 1 Noise Filter (Ignition System) V 4 VSV (Fuel Pressure Control)
N 2 Noise Filter (Oil Pressure Sender)
W 1 Washer Change Valve
O 1 Oil Level Warning SW W 2 Washer Motor
O 2 Oil Pressure Sender W 3 Water Temp. Sender
O 3 Oil Pressure Sender W 4 Water Temp. SW (A/C)
23

Position of Parts in Instrument Panel
A 9 A/C Amplifier C 11 Combination Meter

A 10 A/C System Amplifier C 12 Combination Meter
A 11 A/C Thermistor C 13 Combination Meter
A 12 ABS ECU C 14 Combination SW
A 13 ABS ECU C 15 Combination SW
A 14 Air Inlet Control Servo Motor C 16 Cooling Fan (Radio and Player)
A 15 Air Mix Control Servo Motor C 17 Cruise Control ECU
A 16 Air Vent Mode Control Servo Motor
A 17 Airbag Sensor Assembly D 3 Data Link Connector 3
A 18 Airbag Squib (Front Passenger’s Airbag Assembly) D 4 Diff. Lock Control SW
A 19 Airbag Squip (Steering Wheel Pad) D 5 Diff. Lock ECU
A 20 Ashtray Illumination D 6 Diode (Front Washer)
A 21 Auto Antenna Control SW D 7 Diode (Headlight)
D 8 Diode (Interior Light)
B 2 Blower Motor (A/C) D 9 Diode (Interior Light)
B 3 Blower Motor (Heater) D 10 Diode (Interior Light)
B 4 Blower Resistor D 11 Diode (Rear Washer)
B 5 Blower Speed Control Relay D 28 Diode (Neutral Detection)
C 5 Center Diff. Lock Control Relay E 4 Engine Control Module

C 6 Cigarette Lighter E 5 Engine Control Module
C 7 Cigarette Lighter Illumination E 6 Engine Control Module
C 8 Circuit Opening Relay E 7 Engine Control Module
C 9 Clock E 8 Engine Control Temp. Cut Relay
C 10 Combination Meter
24
G
Position of Parts in Instrument Panel
F 9 Front Speaker LH L 1 Light Retainer Relay

F 10 Front Speaker RH
F 11 Fuse Block R 1 Radio and Player
R 2 Radio and Player
G 3 Glove Box Light R 3 Radio and Player
G 4 Glove Box Light SW R 4 Rear Heater SW
R 5 Rear Window Defogger SW
H 9 Hazard SW R 6 Remote Control Mirror SW
H 10 Heater Control SW and A/C SW R 7 Rheostat
H 11 Heater Control SW and A/C SW
S 3 Seat Belt Warning Relay
I 10 Ignition Key Cylinder Light S 4 Short Connector (SRS)
I 11 Ignition Key Cylinder Light Relay S 5 Short Connector (SRS)
I 12 Ignition SW, Unlock Warning SW and Key Interlock S 6 Short Connector (SRS)
Solenoid S 7 Short Connector (SRS)
S 8 Short Connector (A/C)
J 1 Junction Connector S 9 Short Connector (A/C)
J 2 Junction Connector S 10 Short Pin (Center Diff. Lock)
J 3 Junction Connector S 11 Stereo Component Amplifier
J 4 Junction Connector S 12 Stereo Component Amplifier
J 5 Junction Connector S 13 Stop Light SW
J 6 Junction Connector
25

Position of Parts in Body
A 22 ABS Deceleration Sensor D 24 Door Lock Motor and Door Unlock Detection SW
A 23 ABS Speed Sensor Front LH Front LH
A 24 ABS Speed Sensor Front RH D 25 Door Lock Motor and Door Unlock Detection SW
A 25 ABS Speed Sensor Rear LH Front RH
A 26 ABS Speed Sensor Rear RH D 26 Door Lock Motor Rear LH
D 27 Door Lock Motor Rear RH
B 6 Back Door Courtesy SW
B 7 Back Door Lock Motor E 9 Electronically Controlled Transmission Pattern
Select SW
D 12 Door Courtesy Light Front LH
D 13 Door Courtesy Light Front RH F 12 Front Diff. Lock Control Motor
D 14 Door Courtesy Light Rear LH F 13 Front Diff. Lock Position SW
D 15 Door Courtesy Light Rear RH F 14 Front Door Speaker LH
D 16 Door Courtesy SW Front LH F 15 Front Door Speaker RH
D 17 Door Courtesy SW Front RH F 16 Front Interior Light (w/ Moon Roof)
D 18 Door Courtesy SW Rear LH F 17 Front Interior Light (w/o Moon Roof)
D 19 Door Courtesy SW Rear RH F 18 Fuel Sender and Pump
D 20 Door Key Lock and Unlock SW LH
D 21 Door Key Lock and Unlock SW RH H 12 High Mounted Stop Light
D 22 Door Lock Control Relay
D 23 Door Lock Control SW RH L 2 License Plate Light
M 2 Moon Roof Control Relay

M 3 Moon Roof Control SW and Personal Light
M 4 Moon Roof Limit SW and Motor
26
G
Position of Parts in Body
O 4 O/D Main SW R 17 Rear Window Defogger (+)

R 18 Rear Window Defogger (-)
P 4 Parking Brake SW R 19 Rear Wiper Motor
P 6 Power Window Master SW R 20 Rear Wiper Relay
P 7 Power Window Motor Front LH R 21 Remote Control Mirror LH
P 8 Power Window Motor Front RH R 22 Remote Control Mirror RH
P 9 Power Window Motor Rear LH R 23 Roof Speaker LH
P 10 Power Window Motor Rear RH R 24 Roof Speaker RH
P 11 Power Window SW Front RH
P 12 Power WIndow SW Rear LH S 14 Shift Lock ECU
P 13 Power Window SW Rear RH
T 4 Trailer Socket (Tail and Stop Light)
R 8 Rear Combination Light LH T 5 Trailer Socket (Turn Signal Light)
R 9 Rear Combination Light RH T 6 Trailer Socket (Turn Signal Light)
R 10 Rear Diff. Lock Control Motor
R 11 Rear Diff. Lock Position SW V 6 Vanity Light LH
R 12 Rear Door Speaker LH V 7 Vanity Light RH
R 13 Rear Door Speaker RH
R 14 Rear Heater W 5 Woofer (Speaker)
R 15 Rear Heater Relay W 6 Woofer Amplifier
R 16 Rear Interior Light
27

Position of Parts in Seat
B 8 Buckle SW LH P 19 Power Seat Motor (Driver’s Seat Reclining Control)

P 20 Power Seat Motor (Driver’s Seat Slide Control)
P 14 Power Seat Control SW (Driver’s Seat) P 21 Power Seat Motor (Passenger’s Seat Front Vertical
P 15 Power Seat Control SW (Passenger’s Seat) Control)
P 16 Power Seat Motor (Driver’s Seat Front Vertical P 22 Power Seat Motor (Passenger’s Seat Rear Vertical
Control) Control)
P 17 Power Seat Motor (Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support P 23 Power Seat Motor (Passenger’s Seat Reclining
Control) Control)
P 18 Power Seat Motor (Driver’s Seat Rear Vertical P 24 Power Seat Motor (Passenger’s Seat Slide Control)
Control)
28
MEMO
29

: Location of Connector Joining Wire Harness and Wire Harness
: Location of Ground Points
: Location of Splice Points
30
G
Connector Joining Wire Harness and Wire Harness
CODE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

EA1
EA2 COWL WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (LEFT FENDER)
EA3
EA4 COWL WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (RIGHT FENDER)
EB1 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND ENGINE WIRE (NEAR THE DISTRIBUTOR)
EC1
ENGINE WIRE AND TRANSMISSION WIRE (NEAR THE STARTER)
EC2
EY1 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE AIR CLEANER)
EZ1 ENGINE WIRE AND VSV SUB WIRE (NEAR THE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR)
Ea1 TRANSMISSION WIRE AND SPEED SENSOR WIRE (NEAR THE TRANSMISSION)
31

32
G

ID1
ID2 COWL WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 1 WIRE (LEFT KICK
KIC PANEL)
NEL)
ID3
IE1 ROOF WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)
IF1 COWL WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER)
IG1
COWL WIRE AND A/C SUB WIRE (BEHIND GLOVE BOX)
IG2
IH1
ENGINE WIRE AND COWL WIRE (BEHIND GLOVE BOX)
IH2
II1
COWL WIRE AND FLOOR NO.
NO 2 WIRE (RIGHT KICK
KI PANEL)
NEL)
II2
33

34
G

BJ1
FRONT DOOR LH WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)
BJ2
BK1 FRONT DOOR RH WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)
BL1 ROOF WIRE AND ROOF NO. 3 WIRE (ROOF LEFT)
BM1 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 1 WIRE (UNDER THE CENTER CONSOLE)
BN1
REAR DOOR LH WIRE AND FLOOR NO
NO. 1 WIRE (LEFT CENTER PILLAR)
BN2
BO1 FLOOR NO. 1 WIRE AND LUGGAGE ROOM NO. 2 WIRE (BESIDE THE FUEL TANK)
BP1
REAR DOOR RH WIRE AND FLOOR NO.
NO 2 WIRE (RIGHT CENTER PILLAR)
BP2
BQ1
FLOOR NO.
NO 3 WIRE AND FLOOR NO.
NO 1 WIRE (LEFT QUARTER PANEL INNER)
BQ2
BR1
LUGGAGE ROOM NO.
BR2
BS1
BACK DOOR NO
NO. 1 WIRE AND LUGGAGE ROOM NO
NO. 1 WIRE (LEFT REAR SIDE OF ROOF)
BS2
35

36
G

BT1
BACK DOOR NO
NO. 1 WIRE AND BACK DOOR NO
NO. 2 WIRE (BACK DOOR LEFT)
BT2
BU1 REAR WINDOW NO. 1 WIRE AND BACK DOOR NO. 2 WIRE (BACK DOOR LEFT)
BV1 LUGGAGE ROOM NO. 3 WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 3 WIRE (UNDER THE LOWER BACK PANEL)
BW1 ROOF NO. 2 WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE (RIGHT QUARTER PANEL INNER)
BX1 REAR WINDOW NO. 1 WIRE AND BACK DOOR NO. 2 WIRE (BACK DOOR RIGHT)
Bb1 COWL WIRE AND FRAME WIRE (RIGHT FENDER)
Bd1 COWL WIRE AND SPEED SENSOR NO. 1 WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)
Be1 SPEED SENSOR NO. 2 WIRE AND SPEED SENSOR NO. 1 WIRE (FRONT AXLE HOUSING LH)
Bf1 FRAME NO. 2 WIRE AND SPEED SENSOR NO. 3 WIRE (REAR AXLE HOUSING LH)
Bg1 FRAME NO. 2 WIRE AND SPEED SENSOR NO. 4 WIRE (REAR AXLE HOUSING RH)
Bh1
FLOOR NO
NO. 3 WIRE AND FRAME NO
NO. 2 WIRE (LEFT QUARTER PANEL INNER)
Bh2
37

38
G

Bc1 FLOOR NO. 1 WIRE AND SEAT NO. 1 WIRE (UNDER THE DRIVER’S SEAT)
Bi1 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND SEAT NO. 1 WIRE (UNDER THE PASSENGER’S SEAT)
Bj1 FLOOR NO. 1 WIRE AND SEAT NO. 2 WIRE (UNDER THE DRIVER’S SEAT)
39

The chart below shows the route by which current flows from the battery to each electrical source (Fusible Link,
Circuit Breaker, Fuse, etc.) and other parts.
The next page and following pages show the parts to which each electrical source outputs current.
* These are the page numbers of the first page on which the related
system is shown.
The part indicated is located somewhere in the system, not
necessarily on the page indicated here.
[LOCATION] : R/B No. 2 (See page 18) : Fuse Block (F11 See page 20)
40
: R/B No. 1 (See page 20) : Fusible Link (F6, F7, F8 See page 22)
41
* These are the page numbers of the first page on which the related system is shown.
The part indicated is located somewhere in the system, not necessarily on the page indicated here.

: R/B No. 1 (See page 20)
42
43

44
45

46
47

48
49
MEMO
50

POWER SOURCE
F L A M 1 1 . 2 5B
F L M A IN 2 . 0 L
F L AM 2 0 . 3P
BA TTER Y F6 A F7 B F8 C
FUSIB LE L IN K
1 A 1 B 1 C
B−L
W
2 15A EFI
4 W 1 2 R −Y
E 6 2 2
2 3
W
2 2
W W
W −R
W
E 7
W
W
E9
2 2 2
W
2 2 1 3
W
1
1 1 H EAD
R EL AY
50A AM 1
60A ABS
15 A 15 A HE AD (L H)
1 0A
HAZ− DO M E 2 4
HO R N 1 3 R− L
2
B 2 2
W
2 3 2 2 R −W
2 2 2 2 3 EA2 3 E A3 15 A HEA D (R H)
G 2
G −O
B −W
L −Y
R− Y 1 2 R− W
W −R
G EN ER ATO R
W
2 2
6 EA 2
B
B
I1
W −R
B
W
4 11 I1
1
AM1
AM2
2
I12
IG NITIO N SW
TAIL
R ELAY
IG 1
ST 1
IG 2
ACC
3 2 6 1 3
L− R B−Y 1 1
B −R
R −B
B−Y B −Y W W
I4 I4 I4 I4 I4
B −Y
B −Y
B −Y
W
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
40A F L H EAT ER
3 0A F L P OW E R
20A R EAR −HT R
15A EC U − IG
10 A G AU G E
2 0A D EF OG
7 . 5A T URN
10A ECU −B
2 0A W IPER
1 0A ST O P
7 . 5A IG N
1 5A T A IL
15A O BD
3 0A D FF
15A C IG
F11
FUS E BL OC K
2 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 4
W −G
G −W
G −O
B −W
B −R
L −W
B−L
Y−L
L −O
L−B
GR
G
Y
L
52
SERVICE HINTS
HEAD RELAY
(2) 1- (2) 2 : CLOSED WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT HEAD POSITION OR THE DIMMER SW AT FLASH POSITION
(WHEN THE LIGHT AUTO TURN OFF SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE)
I12 IGNITION SW
4-3 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ACC OR ON POSITION
4-2 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON OR ST POSITION
TAIL RELAY
(1) 2- (1) 3 : CLOSED WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT TAIL OR HEAD POSITION
: PARTS LOCATION
F6 A 22 F8 C 22 G2 22
F7 B 22 F11 25 I12 25
: RELAY BLOCKS
CODE SEE PAGE RELAY BLOCKS (RELAY BLOCK LOCATION)
1 20 R/B NO. 1 (LEFT KICK PANEL)
2 18 R/B NO. 2 (FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDER)
: CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

EA2
30 COWL WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (LEFT FENDER)
EA3
: SPLICE POINTS
CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS CODE SEE PAGE WIRE HARNESS WITH SPLICE POINTS
E6 I1
32 COWL WIRE
E7 30 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE I4
E9
F6 AF 8 C F7 B G RA Y F11 G 2 I1 2 BLA CK
(S EE PA G E 2 0)
1 1
1 2 3 4
X 6 11
53
STARTING AND IGNITION
W−R 11 AM2 IG 2 6 B− R B− R
I6
A CC
B 4 AM1 IG 1
ST1 1 B− W 1 EA2
3 EA2 6 EA2
I1 2
IG N ITIO N SW
B− W B− W I3
I1 3 IG N ITIO N CO IL
B− R
B− R
B− W
TO ENG IN E CO N TR O L
B
21 IH1
TO C RU ISE CO N TR O L
M O DUL E
1 2
B −W
B −W
2
6
EC U
PAR K/NEU TRAL
8
2
PO SITIO N SW
P EA2
B− W
50 A N
AM 1
P 1
5 D 2
3 5 D IS TR IBUTO R
1 B C
B− R
I2
IG N ITER
2
EX IGF IG T NE G1 G− G2
B−R
E19 4 1 2 1 2 4 3
W−R
B− G
B− Y
W
15 IH 1
W
G
R
L
2 14 IH2 13 IH 2
3
B −G
B− R
B− Y
B
4 17 A 23 A 12 B 11 B 6 B 10 B
TO EN G IN E C O NTR OL
GF GT NE G1 G− G2
(SHIEL DED )
2
B− R
M OD UL E
B−L
E4 A ,E 6 B
1 B 1 A ENG IN E C ONTR OL M O DUL E A
J9
JU NCTIO N
CO NNEC TO R
FL AM 1 1 . 25 B
FL AM 2 0 . 3 P
F6 A F 7 B A
FUSIBL E LIN K
1
N 1
N O IS E FIL TER
(IG N ITIO N
1 B S YS TEM )
B 1
W −B
A 2
W−B
M
4 IH1
B ATTERY
W−B
S 1 B S2 A
STAR TER
EC EC
54
SERVICE HINTS
I12 IGNITION SW
4-1 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ST POSITION
S 1 (B) , S 2 (A) STARTER
POINTS CLOSED WITH THE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SW AT P OR N POSITION AND THE IGNITION SW AT ST POSITION
P 1 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SW
6-5 : CLOSED WITH THE A/T SHIFT LEVER IN P OR N POSITION
: PARTS LOCATION
D2 22 I2 23 P1 23
E4 A 24 I3 23 S1 B 23
E6 B 24 I12 25 S2 A 23
F6 A 22 J9 25
F7 B 22 N1 23
: RELAY BLOCKS

EA2 30 COWL WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (LEFT FENDER)
IH1
32 ENGINE WIRE AND COWL WIRE (BEHIND GLOVE BOX)
1H2
: GROUND POINTS
CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINTS LOCATION
EC 30 AIR INTAKE CHAMBER
: SPLICE POINTS
E19 30 ENGINE WIRE I13 32 COWL WIRE
I6 32 COWL WIRE
D 2 BL AC K E 4 A D ARK G R AY E 6 B D AR K G RAY F6 A F7 B G R AY
1
1
1 2 3 4 X X 6
17 X 23 X 1 0 11 1 2
I2 D AR K G RAY I3 BLA CK I1 2 B LA CK J9
1 2 A A A A
1 4
1 2 3 4 5 A A A A A A A
X 6 11
(HINT : S EE PAG E 7 )
N 1 G RA Y P 1 G R AY S 1 B BL ACK S 2 A
X 1
1 2 5 6
55
CHARGING
W
FR O M P O W E R SO UR CE S Y STE M (S EE PA G E 52 )
2 1
7. 5 A IGN
F11
FU S E BLO C K
50 A
AM 1
1 2
B− L
2
B− L
I4
13 A
C 1 1, B C 1 3 A
C HA R G E W A RN ING
L IG H T
[C O M B. M ETE R ]
W
7 B
B− L
Y−L
4 EA 1 5 EA 1
Y− L
3
2
1
4
2
7 . 5A
CH A RG E
2
B− L
W
Y− L
B− L
Y− L
W
B
1 C 1 A
2 A 1 A 3 A 1 B
FL A M 1 1 . 2 5B
FL M AIN 2 . 0L
IG L S B
F 6 A F8 C
FU SIB LE LIN K
G 1 A G2 B
G EN ER ATO R
IC RE G UL ATO R
B A TTER Y
56
SERVICE HINTS
G1 (A) , G 2 (B) GENERATOR
(B) 1-GROUND : 13.9-15.1 VOLTS WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING AT 2000 RPM AND 25C (77F)
13.5-14.3 VOLTS WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING AT 2000 RPM AND 115C (239F)
(A) 3-GROUND : 0-4 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION AND ENGINE NOT RUNNING
: PARTS LOCATION
C11 B 24 F8 C 22 G2 B 22
C13 A 24 F11 25
F6 A 22 G1 A 22
: RELAY BLOCKS

: SPLICE POINTS
I4 32 COWL WIRE
C1 1 B BL U E C13 A F 6 A F8 C
1
X 7 X X 13
F11 G 1 A G RA Y G 2 B
(SEE PAG E 20)

1
1 2 3
57
ENGINE CONTROL
SYSTEM OUTLINE
THE ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM UTILIZES A MICROCOMPUTER AND MAINTAINS OVERALL CONTROL OF THE ENGINE, ETC. AN
OUTLINE OF THE ENGINE CONTROL IS GIVEN HERE.
1. INPUT SIGNALS
(1) ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. SIGNAL CIRCUIT
THE ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. SENSOR DETECTS THE ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. AND HAS A BUILT-IN THERMISTOR WITH A
RESISTANCE WHICH VARIES ACCORDING TO THE WATER TEMP. IS INPUT INTO TERMINAL THW OF THE ENGINE CONTROL
MODULE AS A CONTROL SIGNAL.
(2) INTAKE AIR TEMP. SIGNAL CIRCUIT
THE INTAKE AIR TEMP. SENSOR IS INSTALLED IN THE MASS AIR FLOW AND DETECTS THE INTAKE AIR TEMP. WHICH IS INPUT
AS A CONTROL SIGNAL TO TERMINAL THA OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE.
(3) OXYGEN DENSITY SIGNAL CIRCUIT
THE OXYGEN DENSITY IN THE EXHAUST EMISSION IS DETECTED AND INPUT AS A CONTROL SIGNAL FROM THE HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR (BANK 1 SENSOR 1, BANK 1 SENSOR 2) TO TERMINALS OX1, OX2 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE.
TO STABILIZE DETECTION PERFORMANCE BY THE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR IS WARMED.
(4) RPM SIGNAL CIRCUIT
CRANKSHAFT POSITION IS DETECTED BY THE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR AND THE PICK-UP COIL INSTALLED INSIDE
THE DISTRIBUTOR. CRANKSHAFT POSITION IS INPUT AS A CONTROL SIGNAL TO TERMINAL NE2+ OF THE ENGINE CONTROL
MODULE, AND ENGINE SPEED IS INPUT TO TERMINAL NE.
(5) THROTTLE POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
THE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR DETECTS THE THROTTLE VALVE OPENING ANGLE AS A CONTROL SIGNAL WHICH IS INPUT
INTO TERMINAL VTA OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE. WHEN THE VALVE IS COMPLETELY CLOSED, THE ENGINE IDLING
SIGNAL IS INPUT INTO TERMINAL IDL.
(6) VEHICLE SPEED CIRCUIT
THE VEHICLE SPEED IS DETECTED BY VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR INSTALLED IN THE TRANSMISSION, AND THE SIGNAL IS
INPUT TO TERMINAL SPD OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE VIA THE COMBINATION METER.
(7) NEUTRAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
THE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SW DETECTS WHETHER THE SHIFT POSITION IS IN “N” AND “P” OR NOT, AND THE SIGNAL IS
INPUT INTO TERMINAL STA OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE.
(8) A/C SW SIGNAL CIRCUIT
THE OPERATING VOLTAGE OF THE A/C MAGNETIC CLUTCH IS DETECTED, AND THE SIGNAL IS INPUT INTO TERMINAL A/C OF
THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE AS A CONTROL SIGNAL.
(9) BATTERY SIGNAL CIRCUIT
VOLTAGE IS CONSTANTLY APPLIED TO TERMINAL BATT OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE. WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED
ON, THE VOLTAGE FOR ENGINE CONTROL MODULE START-UP POWER SUPPLY IS APPLIED TO TERMINAL +B OF THE ENGINE
CONTROL MODULE VIA THW EFI MAIN RELAY.
THE CURRENT FLOW THROUGH THE IGN FUSE FLOWS TO TERMINAL IGSW OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE.
(10) INTAKE AIR VOLUME SIGNAL CIRCUIT
INTAKE AIR VOLUME IS DETECTED BY THE MASS AIR FLOW, AND THE SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL VG OF THE ENGINE
CONTROL MODULE AS A CONTROL SIGNAL.
(11) STOP LIGHT SW SIGNAL CIRCUIT
THE STOP LIGHT SW IS USED TO DETECT WHETHER THE VEHICLE IS BRAKING OR NOT, AND THE SIGNAL IS INPUT INTO
TERMINAL STP OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE AS A CONTROL SIGNAL.
(12) STARTER SIGNAL CIRCUIT
TO CONFIRM WHETHER THE ENGINE IS CRANKING, THE VOLTAGE IS APPLIED TO THE STARTER MOTOR DURING CRANKING IS
DETECTED AND THE SIGNAL IS INPUT INTO TERMINAL NSW OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE AS A CONTROL SIGNAL.
(13) ENGINE KNOCK SIGNAL CIRCUIT
ENGINE KNOCKING IS DETECTED BY THE KNOCK SENSOR 1 AND 2, AND THE SIGNAL IS INPUT INTO TERMINALS KNK1 AND
KNK2 AS A CONTROL SIGNAL.
58
2. CONTROL SYSTEM
* SFI SYSTEM
THE SFI SYSTEM MONITORS THE ENGINE CONDITION THROUGH THE SIGNALS INPUT FROM EACH SENSOR (INPUT SIGNALS
FROM (1) TO (13) ETC.) TO THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE. THE BEST FUEL INJECTION TIMING IS DECIDED BASED ON THIS
DATA AND THE PROGRAM MEMORIZED BY THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE, AND THE CONTROL SIGNAL IS OUTPUT TO
TERMINALS #10, #20, #30, #40, #50 AND #60 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE TO OPERATE THE INJECTOR. (INJECT THE FUEL).
THE SFI SYSTEM PRODUCES CONTROL OF FUEL INJECTION OPERATION BY THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE IN RESPONSE TO
THE DRIVING CONDITIONS.
* ESA SYSTEM
THE ESA SYSTEM MONITORS THE ENGINE CONDITION THROUGH THE SIGNALS INPUT TO THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE
FROM EACH SENSOR (INPUT SIGNALS FROM (1), (2), (4) TO (13) ETC.). THE BEST IGNITION TIMING IS DECIDED ACCORDING TO
THIS DATA AND THE MEMORIZED DATA IN THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE, AND THE CONTROL SIGNAL IS OUTPUT TO
TERMINAL IGT THIS SIGNAL, WHICH CONTROLS THE IGNITER TO PROVIDE THE BEST IGNITION TIMING FOR THE DRIVING
CONDITIONS.
* HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CONTROL SYSTEM
THE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CONTROL SYSTEM TURNS THE HEATER ON WHEN THE INTAKE AIR VOLUME IS LOW
(TEMP. OF EXHAUST EMISSIONS IS LOW), AND WARMS UP THE OXYGEN SENSOR TO IMPROVE DETECTION PERFORMANCE OF
THE SENSOR. THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE EVALUATES THE SIGNALS FROM EACH SENSOR (INPUT SIGNALS FROM (1), (2),
(4), (9) TO (11) ETC.), AND OUTPUTS CURRENT TO TERMINALS HT AND HT2 TO CONTROL THE HEATER.
* IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
THE IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (STEP MOTOR TYPE) INCREASES THE ENGINE SPEED AND PROVIDES IDLING STABILITY FOR
FAST IDLE-UP WHEN THE ENGINE IS COLD AND WHEN THE IDLE SPEED HAS DROPPED DUE TO ELECTRICAL LOAD AND SO ON.
THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE EVALUATES THE SIGNALS FROM EACH SENSOR (INPUT SIGNALS FROM (1), (4), (5), (8), (9), (11)
ETC.) AND OUTPUTS CURRENT TO TERMINAL ISC1, ISC2, ISC3 AND ISC4 TO CONTROL THE IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE.
* EGR CUT CONTROL SYSTEM
THE EGR CUT CONTROL SYSTEM CONTROLS THE VSV (EGR) BY EVALUATING THE SIGNAL FROM EACH SENSOR (INPUT
SIGNALS FROM (1), (5), (9)), AND OUTPUTS CURRENT TO TERMINAL EGR OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE.
* FUEL PUMP CONTROL SYSTEM
THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE OOPERATION OUTPUTS TO TERMINAL FPR AND CONTROLS THE FUEL PUMP RELAY AND THUS
CONTROLS THE FUEL PUMP DRIVE SPEED IN RESPONSE TO CONDITIONS.
* FUEL PRESSURE CONTROL SYSTEM
THE FUEL PRESSURE UP SYSTEM CAUSES THE VSV (FUEL PRESSURE CONTROL) TO COME ON FOR HIGH TEMP. STARTS AND
IMMEDIATELY AFTER STARTING IN ORDER TO INCREASE THE FUEL PRESSURE, IMPROVE STARTABILITY AT HIGH
TEMPERATURES AND PROVIDE STABLE IDLING. THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE EVALUATES THE SIGNALS FROM EACH
SENSOR (INPUT SIGNALS FROM (1), (2), (5), (11)), OUTPUTS CURRENT TO TERMINAL FPU AND CONTROLS THE VSV.
3. DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
WITH THE DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM, WHEN THERE IS A MALFUNCTION IN THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL SYSTEM, THE
MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM IS RECORDED IN THE MEMORY. THE MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM CAN BE FOUND BY READING THE
CODE DISPLAYED BY THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP.
4. FAIL -SAFE SYSTEM

WHEN THE MALFUNCTION HAS OCCURRED IN ANY SYSTEM, IF THERE IS A POSSIBILITY OF ENGINE TROUBLE BEING CAUSED BY
CONTINUED CONTROL BASED ON THE SIGNALS FROM THAT SYSTEM, THE FAIL-SAFE SYSTEM EITHER CONTROLS THE SYSTEM
BY USING DATA (STANDARD VALUES) RECORDED IN THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE MEMORY OR ELSE STOPS THE ENGINE.
59
ENGINE CONTROL
B− L
AC C
B− W
4 AM 1 IG 1
B−R
ST1 1
B− R FR O M PO W ER SO U RCE Y−R
I6
SYS TE M (SE E PA G E 5 2)
B− R
R−Y
1 1 AM 2 IG 2 6 1 1 1
G−O
1 0 A G AU G E
1 0A STO P
7. 5 A IG N
Y
B− R
I1 2
IG N ITIO N SW F1 1
W−R
FU SE
B
BL O C K
2 3 2
6 EA2 3 EA2 14 IH1
B−L G −O
B− L
Y
B −R
B
B− L
R
2 B−R B− R
E21
FR O M P OW ER
2 S O UR C E SYS TE M
(SEE P AG E 52)
50A 1
AM 1
R
E16
15 A
1 EF I
7 EA2
2
2
B− R
B− R
B− R
B− R
B− R
B− R
R−Y
R
W −R
W
R− Y
IN JEC TO R N O. 3
INJ ECTO R NO.. 4

INJ ECTO R NO . 2
INJ ECTO R NO . 1
INJ ECTO R NO . 5
INJ ECTO R NO . 6
2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2
I 7
I6
I5
I4
I8
I9
3 3 2
1 1 1 1 1 1
EFI M AIN
4 REL AY
2 1 4
W−G
W −R
W −L
Y− R
Y−L
Y
2 2
Y−R
Y− R
B− L
1 E B1
1 A 1 B Y− R
E20
BR
FL AM 1 1 . 2 5B
FL A M 2 0. 3P
A F7 B
FUS IB LE L INK
Y−R
Y− L
F 6
Y−R
W−G
BATTE RY W−R
W−L
EB
60
B−L B− L
B− W B −W
B− R W −B
Y− R Y− R
R−Y I3
IGNITIO N C OIL
G− O 2
N 1
(SHIELDED)
Y NO ISE FILTER
B− R
(IG NITIO N SYSTEM )
B
1 1 2
J1 B− R B− R
JUNCTION I6 EA2
CO NN ECTO R
A 8
B− R
B− W B−W
EA2
G −O
Y
3 4 5
MAL FUNCTION INDICATO R
B−L B EX C
LAM P [COM B. M ETER]
5 A 2 D 2
I2
R DISTRIBUTOR
IGNITER
R −Y
IGF IG T NE G1 G2 G−
B
S1 3
STO P 1 2 1 2 3 4
A , C1 1
LIG HT
SW
B−G
B−Y
6 B
2 EA2
L
C1 0
(SHIELDED )
1
14 IH2 13 IH2 L
G
I19
R
G −W
B− G
R− Y
Y−R
B− Y
B−L
R
L
3 D 1 D 4 D 14 D 2 D 17 A 23 A 12 B 1 1 B 1 0 B 6 B
M R LY IG SW W S TP BATT IGF IGT NE G1 G2 G−
ENG IN E CO NTR OL M ODUL E
E 4 A E 5 C E6 B E 7 D
# 60 # 50 # 40 # 30 # 20 # 10 L4 SPD A/C THG THW E2

15 A 1 A 2 A 25 A 11 A 12 A 9 D 8 D 7 D 19 A 4 C R−W 9 C
G −Y
L−W
EN GIN E COO L ANT TEM P. SENSOR

EG R GAS TEMP. SENSOR
W −G
W −R
W−L
Y− R
Y− L
B− L
Y
B− W
C OM BINATIO N M ETER
3 1 2
BR− B
2 1
E1
C 13
BR−B
E 3
E16
FROM ENGINE CO OL ANT
FROM TRANSFER L4
Y− R
TEM P. CUT RELAY
POSITIO N SW
Y−L
BR−B
BR−B
BR−B
Y− R
BR
W −G
W −R BR−B BR−B
E1 6 E20
W −L Y− R
ID
61
ENGINE CONTROL
B−L B− L
B− W B −W
W −B W −B
Y− R Y− R
J9
JUN CTION CO NNECTO R
(SH IELD ED ) A A W −B
(SHIE LDED)
A A A A A
(SHIEL DED )
(SHIEL DED )
(SHIE LDED)
(SHIELDED)
L
W −B
1 E17
CR AN KSHAFT PO SIT IO N
1
KNO CK SENSOR 1
KNO CK SENSOR 2
3 2
NE 2 NE−
NE
SENSOR
K1
K2
1
(SH IELD ED)
(SH IELD ED)
(SH IELD ED)
C 3
BR
L− W
B
L L
I19
,
L E 4 A E5 C E 6 B E 7 D
6 C 14 C 5 B 4 B EN GINE CO NTROL M ODULE
KNK1 KNK2 N E2+ NE 2−
IDL V TA VCC O IL THA E2 1 VG E03 EO 2 EO1 E1 FPR

11 C 10 C 1 C 12 C 3 C 16 C 2 C 16 A 26 A 13 A 24 A 13 D
BR
BR
BR
G −W
R− W
R− G
G−B
L− Y
BR
BR− B
W −R
I1 8
BR
A 3 I18
A/T FLUID TE M P.
SE N SOR
BR− B BR− B 1 2 3 5 2
E16
THA E2 1 VG
BR−B
BR− B
E17
M ASS AIR FL OW
BR−B
1 2 3 4
E2 IDL VTA VC
BR−B
T1 E1 7
M 1
THRO TTLE
PO SITIO N
BR− B
BR
SENS OR E2 +B W−R
4 1
BR−B
E1 7
BR− B BR− B
BR−B
Y− R Y−R
EC
62
B−L B− L
B− W B −W
W −B W −B
Y− R Y− R Y−R Y−R Y− R Y− R
E14 E14 E15 E21 E21
Y− R
Y− R
W −B W −B
(SH IELD ED )
BR−B
(SH IELD ED )
HEATE D O XYGE N SENSO R
Y− R
BR− B
Y− R
Y− R
Y− R
BR−B
H EATED OXYGEN SEN SOR
(BANK 1 SENSO R 1)
E15 2 4 2 4
2 EZ1 1 EZ1
( BANK 1 SENSOR 2 )
Y−R +B E1 +B E1
Y−R
VSV (FUEL PRESS URE CO NTRO L)
Y
2 5 HT2 OX2 HT OX
1 2
H 5
ID LE AIR CO NTRO L
1 3 1 3
H 6
VSV (EGR )
V3
VALVE
(SHIEL DED)
(SHIEL DED)
2 1 3 1 6 4
I1
GR
W
O
Y
L
V 4
R−G
R−B
G−Y
Y−L
4 EZ1 3 EZ1
L− W
L− R
22 A 21 A 4 A 6 A 5 A 7 A 7 B 13 C 1 B 5 C
ISC 4
ISC 2
ISC 3
ISC 1
E GR FPU H T2 O X2 HT1 O X1
TE1 OILW TAC O

7 C 5 D 10 D
E 4 A E5 C E 6 B E 7 D
E NG INE C ONTRO L M ODUL E
G−O
Y −L
8
TE1
D 1
DATA L IN K
CO NNEC TO R 1
E1 +B
TO CO M BIN ATIO N M ETER
3 12
BR− B
Y −R
Y− R
BR− B BR−B
W −R W−R
BR− B BR−B
63
ENGINE CONTROL
B−L B− L
B− W B− W B −W
I13
4
W −B W −B
IH1
22
Y− R Y− R Y Y Y
E20 IH1 I12
FROM POW ER SO URCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 52)

Y− R
W −B
1
BR− B
15 A O BD
F11
FUSE
BR− B BLOC K
Y−L
D 3
DATA LINK
CO NNECTO R 3 16
BAT
Y
SDL CG SG
2 4 5
(SHIELDED)
W W
E 4 A E5 C E 6 B E 7 D
ENG INE CO NTRO L M ODU LE 6 D 12 D
SD L +B
BR
BR−B
BR−B
W−B
W−B
W−B
W−B
B− W
Y−R
8 IH2
STA NSW FC
11 D 22 D 14 A
B−W
R−W
B− R
A A
J2 J8
17 IH 1
JU NCTION J UNCTIO N
CON NE CT OR C O NNECTO R
A A
R−W
R− W
B− R
Y− R
BR
BR− B
W −B
W −B
W −R W−R
BR− B
I12
W −B
W −B
EC ID IE
64
B −L
B− W
21 IH 1
B−W
6
P P 1
P ARK /N E U TR AL
N P OSITIO N S W
B−R
B−R
E19 TO S TA RTER
15 IH 1
B−R
I13 TO CO M B IN ATIO N M E TER
2 1
C 8
C IR C UIT O P E NING
R ELA Y
4 3
R− G
R −W
F 4
R− B
FUEL PU M P
R ELAY
2 3 1 13 ID 2
R− W
R −G
1
FU EL PU M P
RE SISTO R
R−W
W −R
3 BO 1
R−B
F5
R−G
2
B−R
3
R−B
F1 8
R− B M FU EL PU M P
I14 [FUE L SEN D ER ]
6
W −B
W−R
5 BO 1
W−B
BF
65
ENGINE CONTROL
SERVICE HINTS
EFI MAIN RELAY
(2) 2- (2) 4:CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON OR ST POSITION
E 4 (A) , E 5 (C) , E 6 (B) , E 7 (D) ENGINE CONTROL MODULE
(VOLTAGE AT THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE)
BATT -E1 : ALWAYS 9.0-14.0 VOLTS
IGSW, +B, MRLY-E1 : 9.0-14.0 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON
VCC -E2 : 4.5-5.5 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON
IDL -E2 : 0-3.0 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED
: 9.0-14.0 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THROTTLE VALVE FULLY OPEN
VTA -E2 : 0.3-0.8 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED
: 3.2-4.9 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THROTTLE VALVE FULLY OPEN
THA -E2 : 0.5-3.4 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND INTAKE AIR TEMP. 20C (68F)
THW -E2 : 0.2-1.0 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. 80C (176F)
STA -E1 : 6.0 VOLTS OR MORE WITH THE CLANKING
IGT -E1 : PULSE GENERATION WITH THE ENGINE IDLING
#10, #20, #30-EO1, EO2 : 9.0-14.0 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON
#40, #50, #60-EO1, EO2 : 9.0-14.0 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON
IGF -E1 : 2.0 VOLTS OR LESS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON
: PULSE GENERATION WITH THE ENGINE IDLING
G1, G2-G- : PULSE GENERATION WITH THE ENGINE IDLING
NE- G- : PULSE GENERATION WITH THE ENGINE IDLING
KNK1, KNK2-E1 : PULSE GENERATION WITH THE ENGINE IDLING
ISC1, ISC2, ISC3, ISC4-E1 : 9.0-14.0 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON
STA -E1 : 9.0-14.0 VOLTS OR LESS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SW AT “P” OR “N” POSITION
: 3.0 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SW AT OTHER THAN “P ” OR “N” POSITION
SPD -E1 : PULSE GENERATION WITH THE IGNITION SW AND ROTATE DRIVING WHEEL SLOWLY
TE1 -E1 : 9.0-14.0 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR 1 TE1-E1 NOT CONNECTED
: 1.5 VOLTS OR LESS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR 1 TE1-E1 CONNECTED
W -E1 : 9.0-14.0 VOLTS WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING AND NO TROUBLE (MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP OFF)
A/C -E1 : 7.5-14.0 VOLTS WITH THE AIR CONDITIONING ON
: 1.5 VOLTS OR LESS WITH THE AIR CONDITIONING OFF
STP -E1 : 7.5-14.0 VOLTS WITH THE STOP LIGHT SW ON (BRAKE PEDAL DEPRESSED)
: 1.5 VOLTS OR LESS WITH THE STOP LIGHT SW OFF
RESISTANCE AT ENGINE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTORS
(DISCONNECT WIRING CONNECTOR)
IDL -E2 : INFINITY (THROTTLE VALVE FULLY OPEN)
: 2.3 KΩ OR LESS (THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED)
VTA -E2 : 2.0-10.2 KΩ (THROTTLE VALVE FULLY OPEN)
: 0.2-5.7 KΩ (THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED)
VCC -E2 : 2.5-5.9 KΩ
THA -E2 : 2.0-3 .0 KΩ (INTAKE AIR TEMP. 20C (68F))
THW -E2 : 200-400 Ω (ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. 80C (176F))
G1,G2-G- : 185-275 Ω (COLD (-10C (14F) TO 0C (122F))
: 240-325 Ω (HOT (50C (122F) TO 100C (212F)
NE -G- : 185-275 Ω (COLD (-10C (14F) TO 0C (122F))
: 240-325 Ω (HOT (50C (122F) TO 100C (212F)
ISC1, ISC2, ISC3, ISC4-+B : 10-30 Ω
I 1 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE
5-4, 6 : 10-30 Ω
2-1, 3 : 10-30 Ω
I 4, I 5, I 6, I 7, I 8, I 9 INJECTOR
1-2 : 12-16 Ω
H 5, H 6 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (BANK 1 SENSOR 1, BANK 1 SENSOR 2)
1-2 : 5.0-6.5 Ω
T 1 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1-4 : 2.5-5.9 KΩ
1-3 : 2.0-10.2 KΩ WITH THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY OPEN
: 0.2-5.7 KΩ WITH THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED
1-2 : INFINITY WITH THE CLEARANCE BETWEEN LEVER AND STOP SCREW 0.75 MM (0.030 IN.)
: 2.3 KΩ LESS WITH THE CLEARANCE BETWEEN LEVER AND STOP SCREW 0.50 MM (0.020 IN.)
F18 FUEL PUMP [FUEL SENDER]
3-6 : 0.2-3.0 Ω
F 5 FUEL PUMP RESISTOR
1-2 : APPROX. 0.73 Ω
E 1 EGR GAS TEMP. SENSOR
1-2 : 69-89 Ω (50C, 122F)
: 11-15 Ω (100C, 212F)
: 2-4 Ω (150 C, 302F)
V 4 VSV (FUEL PRESSURE CONTROL)
1-2 : 37-44 Ω (20C (68F)
66
SERVICE HINTS
V 3 VSV (EGR)
1-2 : 30-34 Ω (20C, 68F)
E 3 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. SENSOR
1-2 : 10-20 KΩ (-20 C, -4F)
: 4-7 KΩ (0C, 32F)
: 2-3 KΩ (20C, 68F)
: 0.9-1.3 KΩ (40C, 104F)
: 0.4-0.7 KΩ (60C, 140F)
: 0.2-0.4 KΩ (80C, 176F)
: PARTS LOCATION
A3 22 F5 22 I12 25
C3 22 F6 A 22 J1 25
C8 24 F7 B 22 J2 25
C10 A 24 F11 25 J8 25
C11 B 24 F18 26 J9 25
C13 24 H5 22 K1 23
D1 22 H6 22 K2 23
D2 22 I1 23 M1 23
D3 24 I2 23 N1 23
E1 22 I3 23 P1 23
E3 22 I4 23 S13 25
E4 A 24 I5 23 T1 23
E5 C 24 I6 23 V3 23
E6 B 24 I7 23 V4 23
E7 D 24 I8 23
F4 22 I9 23
: RELAY BLOCKS

EB1 30 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND ENGINE WIRE (NEAR THE DISTRIBUTOR)
EZ1 30 ENGINE WIRE AND VSV SUB WIRE (NEAR THE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR)
ID2 32 COWL WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 1 WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)
IH1
IH2
BO1 34 FLOOR NO. 1 WIRE AND LUGGAGE ROOM NO. 2 WIRE (BESIDE THE FUEL TANK)
: GROUND POINTS
EB 30 FRONT SIDE OF LEFT FENDER
ID 32 LEFT KICK PANEL
IE 32 RIGHT KICK PANEL
BF 34 UNDER THE CENTER CONSOLE BOX
: SPLICE POINTS
E14 I6
E15 I12
32 COWL WIRE
E16 I13
E17 30 ENGINE WIRE I14
E19 I18
32 ENGINE WIRE
E20 I19
E21
67
ENGINE CONTROL
68
69
HEADLIGHT
W
W 1 1
2 2 2
15A 15A
H EAD (L H ) H EAD (RH )
3 1
H EA D 3 2
W
R EL AY
2 2
4 2
R− W
2 2
R −W
R− L
R−Y R− W
E 2
1
1 1 E A1
R−W
FL M AIN 2. 0L
R−W
F8
FU SIB L E LIN K
E 5 E 2
5 EA 2
I1
R− W
1
R− W
R− W
R− W
R− W
R−L
R−L
D 7
D IO DE
(HE A DL IG H T)
H I G H BE AM IN DI A TO R
L I G H T [CO M B. M E TE R]
B ATTE RY 2
R−L
H E ADL IG HT LO RH
H E ADL IG HT L O L H
C
6
H E ADL IG HT H I R H
H E ADL IG HT HI LH
7 2 2 2 2
L 1
LI G HT
R E TAIN ER 1 1 1 1
C13
H 3
H 1
H 4
H 2
R E LA Y 5
W −B
W −B
R−Y
3
B− O
C14
C O M BIN ATIO N SW 13 14
E3
R−Y
R−Y
O FF
CO NTR OL
TAIL
L IG H T
SW
W−B
H EAD
LO W
DIM M ER S W
H IG H W−B
E 4
FLAS H
11 9 12
W −B
E 4
A
W−B
R− Y
W−B
R−Y
J7
J UN C TIO N
CO N N EC TO R
A
4 E A2
R−Y
W−B
R−Y R− Y
I6
I6
W −B
W−B
ID EB EA
70
SERVICE HINTS
HEAD RELAY
(2) 1 - (2) 2: CLOSED WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT HEAD POSITION OR THE DIMMER SW AT FLASH POSITION
C14 LIGHT CONTROL SW [COMB. SW]
13-11 : CLOSED WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT HEAD POSITION
C14 DIMMER SW [COMB. SW]
14-9 : CLOSED WITH THE DIMMER SW AT FLASH POSITION
12-9 : CLOSED WITH THE DIMMER SW AT HIGH OR FLASH POSITION
: PARTS LOCATION
C13 24 H1 22 J7 25
C14 24 H2 22 L1 25
D7 24 H3 22
F8 22 H4 22
: RELAY BLOCKS

EA1
EA2
: GROUND POINTS
EA 30 FRONT SIDE OF RIGHT FENDER
: SPLICE POINTS
E2 E5 30 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE
32 COWL WIRE
E4 I6
C 13 C 14 BL A CK D 7 O R AN G E F 8
1
X X X 1 2 X
5 6 X
X 9 11 12 13 14
H 1, H 2 B LAC K H 3, H 4 BRO W N J7 BL UE L 1
A A A A A 3
1 2 1 2 A A A A A A A X 7
( H INT : SE E PA G E 7 )
71
TAILLIGHT
W R
1 1
2
F11
15A TAIL
TAIL FUSE B LO C K
R ELA Y
3 EA3
1 3
2
1 1
G
R
B
J1
B G
R −B
JU NC TIO N
C O N NECTO R
B
G
W
10 EA 1 7 ID2
8
L1
G
LI G H T R E TAINE R
R EL AY
2 4 B Q1
G
G
1
B3 2
FL M AIN 2. 0 L
F8
FU SIBL E LIN K
(TAIL AN D STO P L IG HT)

B−L
G
TRAILE R SO C KE T
E5
B3 2
T4
1
BATTERY G
B34
3 BV1
G
C14
C O M BIN ATIO N SW 2
O FF
G
G
CO NTR O L
LIG H T
TA IL
SW
2
[R EA R COM B . LIG HT R H]
[R EA R COM B . LIG HT LH ]
HE AD 3 3
P A RK ING L IGH T
P A RK ING L IGH T
L ICEN S E P LATE
2 2
11
W−B
TA IL L IG HT RH
TA IL L IG HT LH
L IG HT
3 3
A
P 2
P 3
RH
L2
LH
5 5
J7
J U NC TIO N 1
R 9
R 8
C O NNE C TO R
W−B
A
W −B
W −B
1 BV1
W−B
W−B
W−B
W−B
B3 1
W −B
ID EB EA BG
72
SERVICE HINTS
TAIL RELAY
: PARTS LOCATION
C14 24 J7 25 P3 23
F8 22 L1 25 R8 27
F11 25 L2 26 R9 27
J1 25 P2 23 T4 27
: RELAY BLOCKS

EA1
EA3
BQ1 34 FLOOR NO. 3 WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 1 WIRE (LEFT QUARTER PANEL INNER)
BV1 36 LUGGAGE ROOM NO. 3 WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 3 WIRE (UNDER THE LOWER BACK PANEL)
: GROUND POINTS
BG 34 LOWER BACK PANEL CENTER
: SPLICE POINTS
E5 30 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE B32
36 FLOOR NO.
NO 3 WIRE
B31 36 FLOOR NO. 3 WIRE B34
C1 4 BLAC K F 8 F1 1 J1
(SEE PA G E 2 0)
1
2 X X X B B
X 11 B B B B B
(H IN T : SE E P AG E 7)
J 7 BL U E L 1 L 2 P 2, P 3 G RA Y R 8, R 9 T 4 BL A CK
A A A A A 2 2 1 X 2 3 1
A A A A A A A X 8
3
(H IN T : SE E PAG E 7) X 5
73
STOP LIGHT
FR O M PO W ER SO U RC E SYS TEM (SEE PA G E 5 2)
F11
1 0 A S TO P
FU S E BLO CK
2
G −O
S1 3
ST O P LIGH T S W
1
G−W
2 ID2
G −W
1 3
G− W G−W
B18 BR 1 BS 2
G−W
3 BQ 1
G−W
T4
TRAILER SOCKET
(TAIL AND STOP LIGHT)
2
B18
1
G−W
H 12
H IG H M O U NTE D
S TO P L IG HT
G−W
B30 2
W−
G −W
1 BS2
[R E AR CO M B. L IGH T R H]
[R E AR CO M B. L IGH T L H]
6 6
S T O P L IG HT RH
S T O P L IG HT LH
5 5 4 BR 1
R 8
R 9
W−B
W−B
BG BF
74
SERVICE HINTS
S13 STOP LIGHT SW
2-1 : CLOSED WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL DEPRESSED
: PARTS LOCATION
F11 25 R8 27 S13 25
H12 26 R9 27 T4 27

ID2 32 COWL WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 1 WIRE HARNESS (LEFT KICK PANEL)
BR1 34 LUGGAGE ROOM NO. 1 WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 1 WIRE (LEFT QUARTER PANEL INNER)
BS2 34 BACK DOOR NO. 1 WIRE AND LUGGAGE ROOM NO. 1 WIRE (LEFT REAR SIDE OF ROOF)
: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
B18 36 FLOOR WIRE B33 36 FLOOR NO. 3 WIRE
B30 36 FLOOR NO. 3 WIRE
F1 1 H 12 R 8, R 9 S13 BLA CK T4 BLAC K
(S EE P AG E 20 )
1 2
1 2 2
X 5 6
75
BACK-UP LIGHT
FROM POWER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 52)
10A GAUGE
F1 1
FUS E BL O CK
Y
B
J4
JU NC TIO N
C O N NEC TO R
B
Y
6 IH 1
Y
P 1
BA CK− U P LIG H T S W
[PA RK/NEU TRA L P OS ITIO N SW ]
8
R−B
7 IH 1
R−B
R− B TO A/T IN DIC AT OR L IG HT
I1 2
[C O M B . M E TE R]
R−B
19 ID 2
R− B
14 B Q 1
T4
TRAILER SOCKET
R −B
(TAIL AND STOP LIGHT)
R −B R− B 3
B2 9 B34
R− B
R−B
1 1
R 8 R 9
BAC K− UP L IG HT L H BAC K− UP LIG H T RH
[R EA R C O M B. L IG H T L H] [R EA R CO M B. L IG HT RH ]
5 5
W−B
W−B
BG
76
SERVICE HINTS
P 1 BACK-UP LIGHT SW [PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SW]
4-8 : CLOSED WITH THE SHIFT LEVER IN R POSITION
: PARTS LOCATION
F11 25 P1 23 R9 27
J4 25 R8 27 T4 27

IH1 32 ENGINE WIRE AND COWL WIRE (BEHIND GLOVE BOX)
: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
I12 32 COWL WIRE B34 36 FLOOR NO. 3 WIRE
F1 1 J4 P 1 G RAY R 8, R 9 T 4 BL ACK
(SEE PA GE 20)
B B
X 4
B B B B B 1 3
8
X 5
77
ILLUMINATION
1 1
15 A TAIL
F 11
TAIL F U SE B L OC K
R
R EL A Y
W
1 3
2
1 1 G
3 E A3
G
R −B
W
J1
B JU N CTIO N CO NN E CTO R
1
B B B B
8
F L M AIN 2 . 0 L
F8
FU SIB L E L IN K L1
LIG H T R E TAIN E R
G
R EL AY
15 ID 1
G
G
BATTE RY
B13
B− L
TR ANS M ISS IO N P ATTER N SE LEC T SW

A
T
G
G
R 7
E LE CTR O N IC A L LY CO NTR O L L ED
C , C1 3
CO M B IN ATIO N M ETE R
R H EO S TA T
2 C 2 A
E L 1 1
A/T S H IF T L EV ER
[O /D M AI N SW ]
IL L U M INA TIO N
2 3
B , C 12
(* 3 )
(* 4 )
4 3
C14 1 C 12 B
C1 1
C O M BIN A TIO N SW 2
O 4
W −G
W−B
O FF
CO NTRO L
E 9
TAIL B13
W−G
W −B
LIG HT
SW
H EAD
W−G
11
W −G
W −G
A
J2
JU N C TIO N
W−B
C O N N EC TO R 8 ID 2
A
W −G
A J5
J 7 JU N C TIO N
W −B
J U N C TIO N A A C O N NEC TO R A
C O N N EC TO R
A
A
W−B W−B
I12
W −B
W −B
ID
78
R1 A ,R3 B
W−B
RADIO AND PLAYER
W− G G
5 B
10 A
(* 2) (* 2)
J5
R5
REAR W IND OW DEFO GGER SW
4
1
W −G G
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
H9
1
14
H AZARD S W
3
2
A
A
A
W −G W−G W− G W −G G G G G G
I9
I10
I16
I16
IF1
IF1
A 21
A UTO ANTE NNA
C ONTROL SW
1
6
W −G G
J4
A20
ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION
A
A
2
1
W− G G G
I20
JUNCTION CONNECTOR
C7
CIGAL ETTE LIGHT ER ILL UMINATION
2
1
A
W− G G
H1 0
HEATER C O NTR OL SW
AND A/C SW

A
A
3
13
W− G G G
I9
R 2 S1 1 A , S12 B
RAD IO AND PLAY E R STEREO COM PONENT AMPLIFIER
A
9
2
W −G G−W G
2 B
6 A
(* 1) (* 1) (* 1)
R4
REAR HEATER SW
A
A
6
3
W −G G
W −B
A
J8 G4
JUNCTION GLOVE BOX G 3
CONNECTO R LIGHT SW GLO VE BOX LIGHT
A
A
2
1
2
1
W− B W −B W G
*4 : METER ILLUMINATION
IE
*2 : BUILT−IN TYPE AMPLIFIER
*1 : SEPARATE TYPE AMPLIFIER
*3 : A/T INDICATOR ILLUMINATION
79
ILLUMINATION
SERVICE HINTS
TAIL RELAY
(WHEN LIGHT AUTO TURN OFF SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE)
R 7 RHEOSTAT
1-2 : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE RHEOSTAT FULLY TURNED COUNTERWISE AND 0 VOLTS WITH IT FULLY TURNED
CLOCKWISE
: PARTS LOCATION
A20 24 G3 25 L1 25
A21 24 G4 25 O4 27
C7 24 H9 25 R1 A 25
C11 B 24 H10 25 R2 25
C12 C 24 J1 25 R3 B 25
C13 A 24 J2 25 R4 25
C14 24 J4 25 R5 25
E9 26 J5 25 R7 25
F8 22 J7 25 S11 A 25
F11 25 J8 25 S12 B 25
: RELAY BLOCKS

ID1
32 COWL WIRE AND FLOOR NO.
NO 1 WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)
ID2
IF1 32 COWL WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER)
: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
I9 I16 32 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE
I10 32 COWL WIRE I20 32 COWL WIRE
I12 B13 36 FLOOR WIRE
80
81
INTERIOR LIGHT
FRO M PO W ER S O UR CE SY STEM (SEE PAG E 52 )
JU NC TIO N C O N N CTO R
B L− Y L− Y
1 0A B L− Y L− Y
DOME I14
B L− Y L− Y
3
D1 0
2 DIO DE (IN TER IOR L IG H T)
J3
3
L− Y L− Y B B L− Y 16 15 R− W 2 3
EA1
L− Y
B
C 13 1
O P EN D O O R W A RN IN G LIG HT
[CO M B. M ETER ]
L− Y
R− Y
R− L
2 IE 1 4 II2
L−Y
(* 1)
L−Y
1 BL1
L −Y
L− Y L −Y L−Y
B10 B11 B11
(* 2 )
(* 1 )
B
1 BP 2
(* 1)
(* 2)
L −Y
L −Y
L −Y
L −Y
L −Y
L −Y
D O O R C OUR TESY
L IG H T RE A R RH
FR O N T IN TER IO R L IG HT
1 2 2 2 2 2
REA R IN TER IO R L IG H T
[M O O N R O O F C O N TR OL SW ]
VAN ITY L IG HT R H
VAN ITY L IG HT L H
D 15
DOOR
DOOR
O FF
O FF
PE R SO NA L LIG H T
R− L
ON
ON
F1 6 (* 1 )
F1 7 (* 2 )
V 6
V 7
R1 6
1 1 1 1 2 BP 2
M 3
4
W−B
W−B
R− L
B−W
(* 1 )
W −B W−B R −L
R −Y
R −Y
(* 2 )
R−L
R−L
B9 B8 B23
D O O R C O UR TES Y SW R EAR RH
(* 1)
2 BL1
1
R−L
(* 1 )
W−B
R− L
6 IE1 4 IE1 3 IE1

D19
9 II2
R− L
I9
R− Y
W− B
R −Y R −Y R− Y
A I11 I11
J 2
JUN C TIO N R− Y
CO N NE C TO R
A
W −B
I12
W−B
W−B
ID IE
82
*1 : W/ MOON ROOF
*2 : W/O MOON ROOF
L− Y
L− Y L−Y
I14
I11
L− Y IG NITION KE Y CYLINDER
1 LIG HT RE LAY
B
4 ID2
L−Y
L−Y
L−Y
DCTY LP
4 3
1 BN2 1 3 BK1 1 BJ2
R −W
R− B
IG NITIO N KEY CYLINDER LI GHT
DOOR COUR TE SY LIG HT FR ONT R H
L− Y
L− Y
L− Y
DOOR COUR TE SY LIG HT FR ONT L H
DOOR COUR TE SY LIG HT RE AR LH
2 2 2 1 2 BS2
R−W
1 1 1 2
R− W
I10
R−L
R−L
R−L
1 BT2
D14
D13
D12
2 BN2 1 4 BK1 4 BJ2 8 BR1

W−B
R− W
R−B
BACK DO OR COURTESY S W
R−Y
R−Y
R −Y
B17
DOOR CO URTES Y SW R EA R LH
1
1
A
J7
B 6
W−B
R− Y
JUN CTION
CO N NECTO R
A
R−L
R−L
2 BT2
D18
1 ID2
W−B
R−Y 1 BS2
D9
W −B
DIODE
(INTERIO R LIG HT)
W−B
R−L R− L R−L R−L 1 2 R−B

I5 I5 I9 I5
D1 7 D 8 D16
R− B
4 BR1
R− L
DOO R C OURTESY SW DIO DE DOOR COURTESY SW

FRO NT RH (INTERIOR LIGHT) FR ONT LH
3 3
1 R−G R−G 2 1 1 R−B
W −B
II2 ID2
ID BF
83
INTERIOR LIGHT
SERVICE HINTS
F16, F17 FRONT INTERIOR LIGHT
2-GROUND : ALWAYS APPROX. 12 VOLTS
2-1 : CLOSED WITH THE INTERIOR LIGHT POSITION SW AT DOOR POSITION
D16, D17, D18, D19 DOOR COURTESY SW FRONT LH, RH, REAR LH, RH
1-GROUND : CLOSED WITH EACH OF THE DOOR OPEN
B 6 BACK DOOR COURTESY SW
2-1 : CLOSED WITH THE BACK DOOR OPEN
: PARTS LOCATION
B6 26 D15 26 I11 25
C13 24 D16 26 J2 25
D8 24 D17 26 J3 25
D9 24 D18 26 J7 25
D10 24 D19 26 M3 26
D12 26 F16 26 R16 27
D13 26 F17 26 V6 27
D14 26 I10 25 V7 27
: RELAY BLOCKS

1E1 32 ROOF WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)
II2 32 COWL WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)
BJ2 34 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)
BK1 34 FRONT DOOR RH WIRE AND COWL WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)
BL1 34 ROOF WIRE AND ROOF NO. 3 WIRE (ROOF LEFT)
BN2 34 REAR DOOR LH WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 1 WIRE (LEFT CENTER PILLAR)
BP2 34 REAR DOOR RH WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE (RIGHT CENTER PILLAR)
BT2 36 BACK DOOR NO. 1 WIRE AND BACK DOOR NO. 2 WIRE (BACK DOOR LEFT)
: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
I5 B9
I9 B10 36 ROOF WIRE
I11 32 COWL WIRE B11
I14 B23 36 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE
B8 36 ROOF WIRE
84
85
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LIGHT

FRO M P OW E R SO UR CE SY STE M (SEE P AG E 52 )
1 1
1 5A
7 . 5 A T URN
F11 HA Z− HO RN
FUS E B LO CK
2 2
18 2
G−W
G−O G −O
IF1 E A1
8 IF1
G −O
G−W
C14
H 9 TU RN SIGN AL SW
HA ZAR D SW 10 8 [C O M B . SW ]
O FF RH
HA ZA RD TU RN
ON LH
7 9 5 6 5 1 8
G−B
G−Y
G−B
G−Y
G
G
16 IF1 17 IF1 6 IF1
G−Y
G−R
G−B
G−Y
I7 I7
G
G−B
7 I7 I7
IF1
G G
I7
G−R
G −B
G −Y
1 1
G −B
G −Y
2 1 8 9
B L G−B G−Y
I1 I7
FL ASH
RE LAY LH RH
E
G −B
G −Y
3
7 EA1 20 ID2 21 ID2 8 EA1
1 C1 1 1
TU RN SIG NA L
G−B
G−Y
IN D ICA TO R LIG H T
[C O M B . M E TER ]
W−B
9 BQ 1 1 0 BQ 1 W −B
G−B
G−Y
A 2 A 1 A T5 A ,T6 B
CO N NE CTO R
G−B
G−Y
TRAIL ER S OC KET
JUN CTION
A
(TURN SIG N AL
L IG HT) J7
A 2 B 1 B
J UNCTION
S IGN AL L IG HT L H
CO N NE CTO R
J2
1 1
G−B
G−Y
A
F2
FR O NT TUR N
RE AR TU R N SIG N AL LIG H T RH
RE AR TU R N SIG N AL LIG H T L H
F RO N T TU R N
S IG N AL LIG HT R H
2 2
[R EAR CO M B. L IG HT R H]
[R EAR CO M B. L IG HT L H ]
2 2
W −B
F 1
W −B
W −B
W −B
5 5
W −B
W −B
I12
R 8
R 9
W−B
W −B
W−B
IE ID EB BG EA
86
SERVICE HINTS
FLASH RELAY
(1) 2-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON OR THE HAZARD SW ON
(1) 1-GROUND : CHANGES FROM 12 TO 0 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE TURN SIGNAL SW LEFT OR
RIGHT POSITION, AND WITH THE HAZARD SW ON
(1) 3-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY
: PARTS LOCATION
C11 24 F11 25 R8 27
C14 24 H9 25 R9 27
F1 22 J2 25 T5 A 27
F2 22 J7 25 T6 B 27
: RELAY BLOCKS

1F1 32 COWL WIRE AND INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE (INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER)
: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
I1 I12 32 COWL WIRE
32 COWL WIRE
I7
C11 BL UE C14 BL ACK F 1, F 2 GRAY F1 1
1 X X 5 X
(S E E P A G E 2 0 )
1 X 8 9 X 1 2
X 8
H 9 B LA C K J 2 BLUE J 7 B LU E R 8, R 9 T 5 A B LA C K
A A A A A A A A A A
1
X A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
2 2
5 6 7 8 9 10
(H IN T : S E E P A G E 7 ) (H IN T : S E E P A G E 7 ) X 5
T 6 B B LA C K
2
87
LIGHT AUTO TURN OFF

W W
I1
W W
W
W
FROM P OW E R SO U RC E
SYSTEM (SE E PAG E 52 ) 2 2 1
1 1 1 3 2
10A EC U− B
1 5A ECU − IG
HE AD TA IL
F1 1 RE LAY R ELAY
FUS E B LO C K
2 4 3 1
3 EA 3
2 2 1 1
2 3
R−W
R −Y
R
11 EA 1
W
R −W
1
B− W
B− R
R− B
D 7
DIO DE
(H EAD L IG HT)
E7
2
6 1 R−L
7 8
B IG HR LY TRL Y
W
D C TY H T
5 L1 3 2
1 LIG H T R E TAIN ER
R ELA Y B−O
B− L
F L M A IN 2 . 0 L
R−B
F8 C 14
FU SIBLE L INK C O M BINA TIO N SW 13 2
C O NTRO L SW
O FF
3 ID 2
TAIL
L IG H T
R −B
H EA D
11
1
W−B
D16
D O O R COU R TESY A
B A TTE RY S W FRO NT LH
J7
JU N C TIO N
C O NN E CTO R
A
W −B
ID
88
SYSTEM OUTLINE
WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS TO TERMINAL 1 OF THE LIGHT RETAINER RELAY THROUGH ECU-IG
FUSE.
VOLTAGE IS APPLIED AT ALL TIMES TO TERMINAL 8 OF THE LIGHT RETAINER RELAY THROUGH THE TAIL RELAY (COIL SIDE), AND
TO TERMINAL 7 OF THE LIGHT RETAINER RELAY THROUGH THE HEAD RELAY (COIL SIDE).
1. NORMAL LIGHTING OPERATION

<TURN TAILLIGHT ON>
WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW TURNED TO TAIL POSITION, A SIGNAL IS INPUT INTO TERMINAL 2 OF THE LIGHT RETAINER RELAY.
ACCORDING TO THIS SIGNAL, THE CURRENT FLOW TO TERMINAL 8 OF THE RELAY FLOWS THROUGH TERMINAL 2 TO TERMINAL 2
OF THE LIGHT CONTROL SW → TERMINAL 11 → GROUND, CAUSING TAILLIGHTS TO TURN ON.
<TURN HEADLIGHT ON>
WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW TURNED TO HEAD POSITION, A SIGNAL IS INPUT INTO TERMINAL 3 OF THE LIGHT RETAINER RELAY.
ACCORDING TO THIS SIGNAL, THE CURRENT FLOW TO TERMINAL 7 OF THE RELAY FLOWS THROUGH TERMINAL 3 TO TERMINAL
13 OF THE LIGHT CONTROL SW → TERMINAL 11 → GROUND, CAUSING HEADLIGHTS AND TAILLIGHTS TO TURN ON. THE TAILLIGHT
CIRCUIT IS SAME AS ABOVE (SEE <TURN TAILLIGHT ON>).
2. LIGHT AUTO TURN OFF OPERATION

WITH THE LIGHTS ON AND THE IGNITION SW TURNED OFF (INPUT SIGNAL GOES TO TERMINAL 1 OF THE LIGHT RETAINER RELAY),
WHEN THE DOOR OF DRIVER’S SIDE IS OPENED (INPUT SIGNAL GOES TO TERMINAL 5 OF THE LIGHT RETAINER RELAY), THE
RELAY OPERATES, AND THE CURRENT IS CUT OFF WHICH FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 8 OF THE RELAY TO TERMINAL 2 AND FROM
TERMINAL 7 OF THE RELAY TO TERMINAL 3. AS A RESULT, ALL LIGHTS ARE TURNED OFF AUTOMATICALLY.
SERVICE HINTS
L 1 LIGHT RETAINER RELAY
1-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION
5-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE DRIVER’S DOOR OPEN
3-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT HEAD POSITION
2-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT TAIL OR HEAD POSITION
: PARTS LOCATION
C14 24 F8 22 L1 25
D7 24 F11 25
D16 26 J7 25
: RELAY BLOCKS

EA1
EA3
1D2 32 COWL WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 1 WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)
: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
E7 30 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE I1 32 COWL WIRE
89
LIGHT AUTO TURN OFF
90
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
91
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER

FROM P OW ER SO UR CE SY S TEM (SE E P AG E 52 )
2 0 A W IPER
F1 1
FUSE B L O CK
L
L
I1 5
4 E A4
L
C1 5
FRO N T W IPER AND W ASH ER SW
2
[C O M B. SW ]
W 2
M W AS HER
W IPER SW
M O TO R
+B +2 +1 +S INT1 INT2 B1 1
W AS HER SW
L− B
O FF
W EW
INT
O FF
5 E A4
LO
ON
L− B
HI
L− B TO DIO DE
I13
(RE AR W ASH ER )
L
L−B
1
D 6
D IOD E
(FR O NT W A SHER )
2
W 8 L−W
EW 16
+S 4 LG
+1 7 L −R
+2 1 3
+B 18 L
I2
L− R
L− Y
LG
L
W−B
2 3 6 5
+2 +1 +B +S
A M
J7
JUNC TIO N
CO NN EC TO R
A 1 F3
FR O N T W IPER
W−B A A W−B M O TO R
W−B
J8
JU NC TION
C O NN EC TO R
ID IE
92
SYSTEM OUTLINE
WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS TO TERMINAL 18 OF THE FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SW, TERMINAL
2 OF THE WASHER MOTOR AND TERMINAL 6 OF THE FRONT WIPER MOTOR FROM THE WIPER FUSE.
1. LOW SPEED POSITION

WITH THE WIPER SW TURNED TO LO POSITION, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 18 OF THE FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
SW TO TERMINAL 7 → TERMINAL 3 OF THE FRONT WIPER MOTOR → TERMINAL 1 → GROUND, CAUSING THE WIPER MOTOR TO
RUN AT LOW SPEED.
2. HIGH SPEED POSITION

WITH THE WIPER SW TURNED TO HI POSITION, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 18 OF THE FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
SW TO TERMINAL 13 → TERMINAL 2 OF THE FRONT WIPER MOTOR → TERMINAL 1 → GROUND, CAUSING THE WIPER MOTOR TO
RUN AT HIGH SPEED.
3. INT POSITION
WITH THE WIPER SW TURNED TO INT POSITION, THE RELAY OPERATES AND THE CURRENT WHICH IS CONNECTED BY RELAY
FUNCTION FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 18 OF THE FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SW TO TERMINAL 16 → GROUND. THIS FLOW OF THE
CURRENT OPERATES THE INTERMITTENT CIRCUIT AND THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 18 OF THE FRONT WIPER AND
WASHER SW TO TERMINAL 7 → TERMINAL 3 OF THE FRONT WIPER MOTOR → TERMINAL 1 → GROUND AND FUNCTIONS.
THE INTERMITTENT OPERATION IS CONTROLLED BY A CONDENSER’S CHARGED AND DISCHARGED FUNCTION INSTALLED IN
RELAY.
4. WASHER CONTINUOUS OPERATION

WITH THE WASHER SW TURNED TO ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS THROUGH TERMINAL 2 OF THE WASHER MOTOR TO TERMINAL 1
→ TERMINAL 8 OF THE FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SW → TERMINAL 16 → GROUND, CAUSING THE WASHER MOTOR TO RUN,
AND WINDOW WASHER EMITS A WATER SPRAY. THIS CAUSES A CURRENT TO FLOW TO TERMINAL 18 OF THE FRONT WIPER AND
WASHER SW → TERMINAL 7 → TERMINAL 3 OF THE FRONT WIPER MOTOR → TERMINAL 1 → GROUND.
WHILE THE WASHER SW IS ON, WINDOW WASHER KEEPS EMITTING SPRAYS AND FRONT WIPER KEEPS FUNCTIONING.
SERVICE HINTS
C15 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SW [COMB. SW]
16-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY
7-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE WIPER AND WASHER SW AT LO POSITION
: APPROX. 12 VOLTS EVERY APPROX. 1 TO 10 SECONDS INTERMITTENTLY WITH THE WIPER SW AT INT POSITION
4-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON UNLESS THE WIPER MOTOR AT STOP POSITION
13-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE WIPER AND WASHER SW AT HI POSITION
F 3 FRONT WIPER MOTOR
5-6 : CLOSED UNLESS THE WIPER MOTOR AT STOP POSITION
: PARTS LOCATION
C15 24 F11 25 W2 23
D6 24 J7 25
F3 22 J8 25

EA4 30 COWL WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (RIGHT FENDER)
: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
I2 I15 32 COWL WIRE
32 COWL WIRE
I13
93
REAR WIPER AND WASHER

FRO M PO W ER S OU R CE SYS TEM (SE E PAG E 5 2)
1
C 15
R EAR W IP ER AN D W AS HER S W
[C O M B. SW ]
2 0A W IPER
F11 WR C1 R +1 R EW
FU SE BL O CK
W ASH ER2
O FF
2
INT
L
L L
I2 I2 ON
4 EA4
W ASH ER1
(FRO N T W ASH ER) 2 10 1 16

L
L
2
L−B
LG
W 2
TO DIODE
M W AS HE R
2 ID1 M OTO R 6 ID1 12 ID 1
L−O
L−B
LG
L
L− B
1 BR2 2 BR 1 5 BR 1
5 EA4 D1 1
L−B
LG
L
L−B
L−B
DIO D E
L
(R EAR W ASH ER )
L −B 1 2 L −O
I12 I7
6 B S1 5 BS1 4 B S1
L −G
L −B
W 1
L
W ASH ER C HA NG E
L− O
V AL VE
4 BT1 5 B T1 6 B T1
1 2
W−B
L−G
L− B
L
4 6
L 1
I20 LS C1
+B
R EAR W IPER R EL AY
L
R 20
+S LM
2 3
L −R
A
L −W J7
J UNC TION
C O NN EC TO R
A
3 1 4
+1 +B S
W−B
2 1 4
2 W−B W −B W−B
M B T2 BS2 BR1
E
W−B
R 19
R EAR W IP ER
M OTO R
BF ID
94
SYSTEM OUTLINE
WHEN THE IGNITION SW IS TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS TO TERMINAL 2 OF THE WASHER MOTOR, TERMINAL 1 OF THE
WASHER CHANGE VALVE, TERMINAL 1 OF THE REAR WIPER RELAY AND TERMINAL 1 OF THE REAR WIPER MOTOR FROM THE
WIPER FUSE.
1. REAR WIPER NORMAL OPERATION

WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON AND THE REAR WIPER AND WASHER SW TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FROM TERMINAL 1 OF
THE REAR WIPER RELAY FLOWS TO TERMINAL 6 OF THE RELAY → TERMINAL 1 OF THE REAR WIPER AND WASHER SW →
TERMINAL 16 → GROUND. THUS, THE RELAY COIL IS ACTIVATED, AND THE CURRENT FROM TERMINAL 1 OF THE RELAY FLOWS TO
TERMINAL 3 → TERMINAL 3 OF THE REAR WIPER MOTOR → TERMINAL 2 → GROUND, CAUSING THE MOTOR TO ROTATE TO
OPERATE REAR WIPER.
2. REAR WIPER INTERMITTENT OPERATION

WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON AND THE REAR WIPER AND WASHER SW TURNED TO INT POSITION, THE CURRENT FROM
TERMINAL 1 OF THE REAR WIPER RELAY FLOWS TO TERMINAL 4 OF THE RELAY → TERMINAL 10 OF THE REAR WIPER AND
WASHER SW → TERMINAL 16 → GROUND, AS A RESULT, THE RELAY OPERATES FOR APPROX. 6 - 10 SEC., AND THE CURRENT
FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 1 OF THE REAR WIPER RELAY TO TERMINAL 3 → TERMINAL 3 OF THE REAR WIPER MOTOR → TERMINAL
2 → GROUND, CAUSING THE MOTOR TO ROTATE TO OPERATE THE REAR WIPER. AT THIS TIME, THE CONTACT IN THE WIPER
MOTOR CLOSES, AND THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 1 OF THE REAR WIPER MOTOR TO TERMINAL 4 → TERMINAL 2 OF
THE REAR WIPER RELAY → TERMINAL 3 → TERMINAL 3 OF THE REAR WIPER MOTOR → TERMINAL 2 → GROUND.
THUS, THE INTERMITTENT-STOP CURRENT OPERATES, THE CONDENSER IN THE CIRCUIT CHARGES AND THE WIPER CONTINUES
TO OPERATE UNTIL REACHING THE STOP POSITION. AFTER THE WIPER STOPS, THE CURRENT DOES NOT FLOW TO THE
INTERMITTENT-STOP CIRCUIT FROM TERMINAL 2 OF THE RELAY, BUT THE CONDENSER DISCHARGES THE CURRENT INTO THE
INTERMITTENT CIRCUIT AND THE CIRCUIT OPERATES UNTIL THE CONDENSER DISCHARGE ENDS. AS, A RESULT, THIS DISCHARGE
INTERVAL BECOMES THE INTERMITTENT TIME.
WHEN THE CURRENT IS DISCHARGED COMPLETELY, THE CURRENT FROM TERMINAL 1 OF THE RELAY FLOWS TO TERMINAL 4 →
TERMINAL10 OF THE REAR WIPER AND WASHER SW → TERMINAL 16 → GROUND.
THEN, THE CURRENT FROM TERMINAL 1 OF THE RELAY FLOWS TO TERMINAL 3 → TERMINAL 3 OF THE REAR WIPER MOTOR→
TERMINAL 2 → GROUND, ROTATING THE MOTOR. ACCORDING TO REPETITION OF THIS PROCESS, INTERMITTENT OPERATION OF
THE REAR WIPER OCCURS.
3. WASHER OPERATION
WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON AND THE REAR WIPER AND WASHER SW TURNED TO ON OR INT POSITION, WHEN THE WIPER
SW IS PUSHED STRONGLY TOWARD THE ON OR INT SIDE, THE CURRENT FROM TERMINAL 2 OF THE WASHER MOTOR FLOWS TO
TERMINAL 1 OF THE MOTOR → TERMINAL 2 OF THE REAR WIPER SW → TERMINAL 16 → GROUND, SO THAT THE WASHER MOTOR
ROTATES AND THE WINDOW WASHER EMITS A WATER SPRAY, ONLY WHILE THE WIPER SW IS PRESSED. AT THE SAME TIME, THE
WASHER CHANGE VALVE OPERATES.
WHEN THE CURRENT FLOWS TO THE WASHER CHANGE VALVE, THE WASHER CHANGE VALVE IS ACTIVATED AND WASHER EMITS
A WATER SPRAY ON THE REAR WINDOW.
SERVICE HINTS
W 2 WASHER MOTOR
1-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE WASHER SW TURNED ON
R20 REAR WIPER RELAY
4-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE REAR WIPER SW AT INT POSITION
6-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE REAR WIPER SW AT ON POSITION
: PARTS LOCATION
C15 24 J7 25 W1 23
D11 24 R19 27 W2 23
F11 25 R20 27

BR1
34 LUGGAGE ROOM NO.
BR2
BS1
34 BACK DOOR NO
BS2
BT1
36 BACK DOOR NO
BT2
95
REAR WIPER AND WASHER

: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
I2 I12
32 COWL WIRE 32 COWL WIRE
I7 I20
C15 BLACK D11 GRAY F11 J7 BLUE R19
(SEE PAGE 20)

1 2 A A A A A
1 2 X X X A A A A A A A
1 2
10 X X X 16 X X
(HINT : SEE PAGE 7) 3 4
R20 W1 DARK GRAY W2 BLACK
1 2 3
1 2
4 X 6
1 2
96
HORN
FR O M PO W ER S O UR C E SYS TE M (S EE PAG E 5 2)
15 A
H AZ−H O R N
G −O
2
HO R N
REL A Y
1 3
C 14 2 2
H O RN SW
[C O M B . S W ]
1
10 G−R G −R G−W
G−W
EA 1
1 1
H 8 H 7
HO R N RH H O RN LH
SERVICE HINTS
HORN RELAY
(2) 2- (2) 3 : CLOSED WITH THE HORN SW ON
: PARTS LOCATION
C14 24 H7 22 H8 22
: RELAY BLOCKS

C14 B LAC K H 7, H 8 B L AC K
1
X X X
X 10
97
MOON ROOF
FR O M PO W ER SO UR C E SYSTEM (SEE PAG E 52 )
1 3
3 0 A F L P O W ER
10A G A UG E
F11
FUSE B LO CK
D 22
3 4 D O O R LO C K
C O NTR O L R EL AY
Y
A
J1 20
L L 8
JUN CTIO N I3 B J1 5 3
14 R−L R− G R−G
CO N N ECTOR B J2 II2
A 8
Y Y 1
B J2 3 3
2 R −G R−B R− B
B J1 ID2
DO OR C O UR TESY
DO OR C O UR TESY
1 1
6
G −O G −O 15
SW FRO NT RH
SW FRO NT LH
B J2
L
11 16
D1 6
D1 7
W −B
B J1 M 2
1 1 M O O N R OO F
CO N TRO L REL AY
3 4
PO W ER
RE LAY
1 2
1 1
L−B
5 IE1
TIM ER
L−B
6 IG
W−B
Q
R
DO W N /
C L OS E
O P EN
S
U P/
LS . 1 LS. 2 − + G ND UP DOWN O PE N C LO S E
8 9 5 4 11 3 7 1 2
W −B
G− W
R− W
G− Y
R−Y
R− L
R
G
A
J2 A 1 4 6 3 5 2 3 6
JUN CTIO N
CO N N ECTOR
NO . 1
NO . 2
C LO S E
A
D OW N
O P EN
M
UP
M 4 5 2 4 M 3
M OO N R OO F M O O N R O O F C O N TRO L
W−B
W−B
W−B
W−B
LIM IT S W S W [P ER SON A L LIG H T]

AN D M O TO R
W−B W −B W−B
B 9 B 8
6
W−B
I12 IE 1
W −B
W −B
IE ID
98
SYSTEM OUTLINE
CURRENT IS APPLIED AT ALL TIMES THROUGH FL POWER FUSE TO TERMINAL 4 OF THE POWER RELAY.
WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 3 OF THE POWER RELAY TO TERMINAL 1 →
GROUND THROUGH GAUGE FUSE. AS A RESULT, THE POWER RELAY IS ACTIVATED AND THE CURRENT TO TERMINAL 4 OF THE
POWER RELAY FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 2 OF THE RELAY TO TERMINAL 6 OF THE MOON ROOF CONTROL RELAY.
1. SLIDE OPEN OPERATION

WHEN THE IGNITION SW IS TURNED ON AND THE MOON ROOF CONTROL SW IS PUSHED TO THE OPEN POSITION, A SIGNAL IS
INPUT FROM TERMINAL 3 OF THE MOON ROOF CONTROL SW TO TERMINAL 1 OF THE MOON ROOF CONTROL RELAY. THE MOON
ROOF LIMIT SW NO. 2 IS TURNED ON AT THIS TIME.
WHEN THIS OCCURS, THE RELAY IS ACTIVATED AND THE CURRENT TO TERMINAL 6 OF THE MOON ROOF CONTROL RELAY FLOWS
FROM TERMINAL 5 → TERMINAL 6 OF THE MOON ROOF MOTOR → TERMINAL 3 → TERMINAL 4 OF THE MOON ROOF CONTROL
RELAY → TERMINAL 11 → GROUND, ROTATING THE MOTOR TO OPEN THE MOON ROOF WHILE THE SW IS BEING PUSHED TO
OPEN POSITION.
2. SLIDE OPEN OPERATION

WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON AND THE MOON ROOF COMPLETELY OPEN AND THE MOON ROOF LIMIT SWITCH NO. 1 AND
NO. 2 BOTH ARE ON, WHEN THE MOON ROOF CONTROL SW IS PUSHED TO THE CLOSE POSITION, A SIGNAL IS INPUT FROM
TERMINAL 6 OF THE MOON ROOF CONTROL SW TO TERMINAL 2 OF THE MOON ROOF CONTROL RELAY.
WHEN THIS OCCURS, THE RELAY IS ACTIVATED AND THE CURRENT TO TERMINAL 6 OF THE MOON ROOF CONTROL RELAY FLOWS
FROM TERMINAL 4 → TERMINAL 3 OF THE MOON ROOF MOTOR → TERMINAL 6 → TERMINAL 5 OF THE MOON ROOF CONTROL
RELAY → TERMINAL 11 → GROUND, ROTATING THE MOTOR TO CLOSE THE MOON ROOF WHILE THE SW IS BEING PUSHED TO
CLOSE POSITION.
WHEN THE MOON ROOF LIMIT SW NO. 1 IS TURNED OFF (THE MOON ROOF LIMIT SW NO. 2 IS ON) AND MOON ROOF REACHES 100
MM FROM FULLY CLOSE POSITION, SIGNAL IS INPUT FROM TERMINAL 1 OF THE LIMIT SW NO. 1 TO TERMINAL 8 OF THE MOON
ROOF CONTROL RELAY. THIS SIGNAL ACTIVATES THE RELAY AND STOPS CONTINUITY FROM TERMINAL 6 OF THE MOON ROOF
CONTROL RELAY TO TERMINAL 11, AS A RESULT, THE MOON ROOF STOPS AT THIS POSITION.
TO CLOSE THE MOON ROOF COMPLETELY, PUSHING THE MOON ROOF CONTROL SW AGAIN TO THE CLOSE SIDE CAUSES A
SIGNAL TO BE INPUT AGAIN TO TERMINAL 2 OF THE MOON ROOF CONTROL RELAY. THIS ACTIVATES THE RELAY AND THE MOON
ROOF WILL CLOSE AS LONG AS THE MOON ROOF CONTROL SW IS BEING PUSHED, ALLOWING THE MOON ROOF TO FULLY
CLOSE.
3. TILT UP OPERATION
WHEN THE MOON ROOF CONTROL SW IS PUSHED TO TILT UP POSITION, WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON AND THE MOON
ROOF COMPLETELY CLOSED (MOON ROOF LIMIT SW NO. 2 IS OFF), A SIGNAL IS INPUT FROM TERMINAL 5 OF THE MOON ROOF
CONTROL SW TO TERMINAL 3 OF THE MOON ROOF CONTROL RELAY. AS A RESULT, THE RELAY IS ACTIVATED AND THE CURRENT
TO TERMINAL 6 OF THE RELAY FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 4 OF THE RELAY TO TERMINAL 3 OF THE MOON ROOF MOTOR →
TERMINAL 6 → TERMINAL 5 OF THE RELAY → TERMINAL 11 → GROUND, ROTATING THE MOTOR SO THAT TILT UP OPERATION
OCCURS AS LONG AS MOON ROOF CONTROL SW IS PUSHED ON THE TILT UP SIDE.
4. TILT DOWN OPERATION

WHEN THE MOON ROOF CONTROL SW IS PUSHED TO TILT DOWN POSITION, WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON AND THE MOON
ROOF TILTED UP (MOON ROOF LIMIT SW NO. 1 AND NO. 2 ARE BOTH OFF), A SIGNAL IS INPUT FROM TERMINAL 2 OF THE MOON
ROOF CONTROL SW TO TERMINAL 7 OF THE MOON ROOF CONTROL RELAY.
AS A RESULT, THE RELAY IS ACTIVATED AND THE CURRENT TO TERMINAL 6 OF THE RELAY FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 5 OF THE
RELAY → TERMINAL 6 OF THE MOON ROOF MOTOR → TERMINAL 3 → TERMINAL 4 OF THE RELAY → TERMINAL 11 → GROUND,
ROTATING THE MOTOR SO THAT TILT DOWN OPERATION OCCURS AS LONG AS THE MOON ROOF CONTROL SW IS PUSHED ON
THE TILT DOWN SIDE. (DURING TILT DOWN, THE LIMIT SW NO. 1 CHANGES FROM OFF TO ON.)
5. TILT UP REMINDER SYSTEM

WHEN THE IGNITION SW IS TURNED ON TO ACC OR OFF, WITH THE MOON ROOF STILL TILTED UP, THE CURRENT DOES NOT FLOW
TO TERMINAL 6 OF THE MOON ROOF CONTROL RELAY.
THIS IS RECEIVED BY THE RELAY AS A SIGNAL THAT THE IGNITION SW IS TURNED OFF. AT THIS TIME, THE MOON ROOF LIMIT SW
NO. 1 AND NO. 2 ARE OFF, SO SIGNALS ARE INPUT TO TERMINAL 8 AND 9 OF THE MOON ROOF CONTROL RELAY THAT THE MOON
ROOF IS IN THE TILT OPERATION POSITION. WHEN THESE SIGNALS ARE INPUT TO THE MOON ROOF CONTROL RELAY, THE TIMER
BUILT INTO THE RELAY OPERATES.
6. KEY OFF MOON ROOF OPERATION

WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED FROM ON TO OFF, THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY OPERATES AND THE CURRENT FLOWS
FROM FL POWER FUSE TO TERMINAL 8 OF THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY → TERMINAL 15 → TERMINAL 3 OF THE POWER
RELAY → TERMINAL 1 → GROUND, AT THIS TIME, FOR ABOUT 60 SECONDS THE SAME AS NORMAL OPERATION, THE CURRENT
FLOWS FROM POWER FUSE → TERMINAL 4 OF THE POWER RELAY → TERMINAL 2 → TERMINAL 6 OF THE MOON ROOF CONTROL
RELAY. AS A RESULT, FOR ABOUT 60 SECONDS AFTER THE IGNITION SW IS TURNED OFF, THE FUNCTION OF THIS RELAY MAKES IT
POSSIBLE TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE MOON ROOF. ALSO, BY OPENING THE FRONT DOOR (THE DOOR COURTESY SW ON) WITHIN
ABOUT 60 SECONDS.
AFTER TURNING THE IGNITION SW TO OFF, A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL 2 OR 14 OF THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY. AS A
RESULT, THE RELAY TURNS OFF, AND OPEN AND CLOSE MOVEMENT OF THE MOON ROOF STOPS.
99
MOON ROOF
SERVICE HINTS
POWER RELAY
(1) 4- (1) 2 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION OR KEY OFF OPERATED
M 2 MOON ROOF CONTROL RELAY
6-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION OR KEY OFF OPERATED
4-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND MOON ROOF CONTROL SW AT
CLOSE OR UP POSITION (EXCEPT APPROX. 100 MM (3.941 IN.) 2 SECOND IN THE BEFORE CLOSED POSITION)
5-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND MOON ROOF CONTROL SW AT OPEN OR DOWN POSITION
9-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS → 0 VOLTS WITH FROM OPEN TO CLOSE
0 VOLTS WITH UP OR DOWN POSITION
0 VOLTS → APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH APPROX. 100 MM (3.941 IN.) 2 SECOND IN THE BEFORE CLOSED POSITION
8-GROUND : 0 VOLTS → APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH FROM UP TO DOWN
M 3 MOON ROOF CONTROL SW
5-4 : CLOSED WITH THE MOON ROOF CONTROL SW AT UP POSITION
6-4 : CLOSED WITH THE MOON ROOF CONTROL SW AT CLOSE POSITION
2-4 : CLOSED WITH THE MOON ROOF CONTROL SW AT DOWN POSITION
3-4 : CLOSED WITH THE MOON ROOF CONTROL SW AT OPEN POSITION
: PARTS LOCATION
D16 26 F11 25 M2 26
D17 26 J1 25 M3 26
D22 26 J2 25 M4 26
: RELAY BLOCKS

1E1 32 ROOF WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)
BJ1
34 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT
(LE KICK PANEL)
NEL)
BJ2
: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
I3 32 COWL WIRE B8
36 ROOF WIRE
I12 32 COWL WIRE B9
100
101
CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND CLOCK

FR O M PO W ER SO U RC E SYS TEM (S EE PA G E 52 )
1 1 1
10 A
1 5 A T AIL
1 5 A CIG
F1 1 DO M E
FU SE BL O C K
2 2 2
GR
G
J3 A A J4
JUN CTIO N JUN CTIO N
CO NN EC TO R CO N NE CTO R
L −Y
A A
GR
GR G
I8
3 EA1
GR
L −Y
2 4 2
C 6
C IG AR ETTE C 9
L IG HT ER C L OC K
1
1 3
L−Y B B
J3
JUN CTIO N
CO N NE CTO R
W−B
W−B
A A
J 7 J8
J UNC TIO N JU NCTIO N
C O N NEC TO R CO N NE CTO R
A A
W−B
W−B
ID IE
102
SERVICE HINTS
C 6 CIGARETTE LIGHTER
2-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ACC OR ON POSITION
1-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUTIY
C 9 CLOCK
3-GROUND : ALWAYS APPROX. 12 VOLTS (POWER FOR CLOCK)
4-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ACC OR ON POSITION (POWER FOR INDICATION)
2-GROUND : APPROX 12 VOLTS WITH THE LIGHT CONTROL SW AT TAIL OR HEAD POSITION
1-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUTIY
: PARTS LOCATION
C6 24 J3 25 J8 25
C9 24 J4 25
F11 25 J7 25
: RELAY BLOCKS
2 18 R/B NO. 2 (FRONT SIDE OF THE LEFT FENDER)

: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
I8 32 COWL WIRE
C 6 C 9 F 11 J 3 J 4
1 (S EE PAG E 2 0 )
1 2
2 A A A B B A A A
3 4
A A A B B B B B A A A
(HIN T : SE E PAG E 7 ) (H INT : SEE P A G E 7)
J7 B LU E J 8 BL UE
A A A A A A A A A A
A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
(HINT : SEE PA G E 7 ) (HINT : S EE PA G E 7 )
103
REMOTE CONTROL MIRROR

FR O M PO W ER SO URC E S YSTEM (SEE PAG E 52 )
15A CIG
F1 1
FU SE BL O CK
GR
R 6
RE M O TE CO NTR OL M IR RO R SW 1
B
O PER ATIO N SW
L EF T
R IG H T
DOWN
UP
LEFT
/D O W N
R IG H T
/U P
SE LE CT SW
LH RH LH RH
HL HR VL VR M+ E
9 2 10 6 3 4
W−B
G−R
W
G
Y− R
A
W J2
I4 J U NC TION
C O NN EC TO R
A
W
9 B J1 6 BJ 1 10 BJ1 9 BK 1 6 B K1 10 BK 1
W−B
W
W
G
G
Y
I12
1 2 3 1 2 3
W −B
W −B
M M M M
R 21 R 22
R EM O TE C ON TR O L R EM O TE C O NTR O L
M IR RO R L H M IRR O R R H
ID IE
104
SERVICE HINTS
R 6 REMOTE CONTROL MIRROR SW
1-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ACC ON ON POSITION
3-4 : CONTINUITY WITH THE OPERATION SW AT UP OR LEFT POSITION
9-4 : CONTINUITY WITH THE OPERATION SW AT RIGHT POSITION AND THE SELECT SW AT LH POSITION
10-4 : CONTINUITY WITH THE OPERATION SW AT DOWN POSITION AND THE SELECT SW AT LH POSITION
2-4 : CONTINUITY WITH THE OPERATION SW AT RIGHT POSITION AND THE SELECT SW AT RH POSITION
6-4 : CONTINUITY WITH THE OPERATION SW AT DOWN POSITION AND THE SELECT SW AT RH POSITION
: PARTS LOCATION
F11 25 R6 25 R22 27
J2 25 R21 27

: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
F11 J 2 B LU E R 6 R21, R 22
(S E E P A G E 20 )
A A A A A 1 2 3
A A A A A A A 1 2 3 4
X 6 X X 9 10
(H IN T : S E E P A G E 7 )
105
SHIFT LOCK
FR O M PO W ER SO UR CE S YSTE M (SEE PAG E 5 2 )
1 1 1
1 5A E CU− IG
10 A S TOP
1 5 A CIG
F1 1
FU SE BL OC K
2 3 2
G −O
B− W
GR
A B
J 3 J6 S1 3
J U NC TION JU NCTIO N STO P L IG HT
C O NN EC TO R CO N NE CTO R SW
A B
B− W
GR
G−W
12 ID 2 15 ID 2 2 ID 2
G−W
B− W
GR
S1 4
1 SHIFT L O CK ECU 3 6
ACC IG STP
SHIFT LO CK
CO NTR O L SW
P1 G− R 3
P2 G−W 1
P G 2
S LS + L−R
SHIFT LO C K
SO LEN O ID
S LS − L 1 2
KL S+ E
4 5
G−B
11 ID2
G−B
I12
KE Y INTER LO C K SOL EN O ID
[IG NITIO N S W ]
7
W −B
W−B
A
J7
JU NCTIO N
CO N NE CTO R
A
W−B
ID BF
106
SYSTEM OUTLINE
WHEN THE IGNITION SW IS TURNED TO ACC POSITION THE CURRENT FROM THE CIG FUSE FLOWS TO TERMINAL 1 OF THE SHIFT
LOCK ECU. AT THE ON POSITION, THE CURRENT FROM THE ECU- IG FUSE FLOWS TO TERMINAL 3 OF THE SHIFT LOCK ECU.
1. SHIFT LOCK MECHANISM

WITH THE IGNITION SW ON, WHEN A SIGNAL THAT BRAKE PEDAL IS DEPRESSED (THE STOP LIGHT SW ON) AND A SIGNAL THAT
SHIFT LEVER IS PUT IN “P” POSITION (CONTINUITY BETWEEN P1 AND P OF THE SHIFT POSITION SW) IS INPUT TO THE SHIFT LOCK
ECU. THE SHIFT LOCK ECU OPERATES AND THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 3 OF THE SHIFT LOCK ECU → TERMINAL SLS+
→ TERMINAL 2 OF THE SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID → SOLENOID → TERMINAL 1 → TERMINAL SLS- OF THE SHIFT LOCK ECU →
TERMINAL 5 → GROUND. THIS CAUSES THE SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID TO TURN ON (PLATE STOPPER DISENGAGES), AND SHIFT
LEVER CAN BE SHIFTED INTO OTHER POSITION THAN THE “P” POSITION.
2. KEY INTER LOCK MECHANISM

WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON OR ACC POSITION, WHEN SHIFT LEVER IS PUT IN “P” POSITION (NO CONTINUITY BETWEEN P2 AND
P OF LOCK CONTROL SW), THE CURRENT FROM TERMINAL 4 OF THE SHIFT LOCK ECU TO THE KEY INTER LOCK SOLENOID IS CUT
OFF. THIS CAUSES THE KEY INTER LOCK SOLENOID TO TURN OFF (LOCK LEVER DISENGAGES FROM LOCK POSITION), AND THE
IGNITION KEY CAN BE TURNED FROM ACC TO LOCK POSITION.
SERVICE HINTS
S14 SHIFT LOCK ECU
6-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL DEPRESSED (STOP LIGHT SW ON)
: PARTS LOCATION
F11 25 J6 25 S14 27
I12 25 J7 25
J3 25 S13 25

: GROUND POINTS
F11 I1 2 J3 J 6
B L ACK
(S EE P AG E 2 0) A A A B B
X 7 8 A A A B B B B B
(HINT : S E E PAG E 7 ) (H IN T : S EE PAG E 7)
J7 B L UE S13 BLA C K S14
A A A A A
A A A A A A A
1 2 1 X 3
(HINT : SEE PAG E 7 ) 4 5 6
107
POWER WINDOW
FRO M PO W E R SO UR CE SYSTEM (SEE P AG E 5 2)
1 3
D 22
D O O R L O CK C O NTR O L
3 0 A F L PO W ER
R ELAY
10A G AUG E
F11
R−G 2 1 Y FU SE BLO CK
8 BJ2
14 15
J1
R −L
JUN CTIO N 3 4
CO N NEC TO R
Y
A A L L
G−O
I3
3 B J1 5 BJ2
16 1 1
6
G −O
BJ2 3 4
W−B
R− G
R− B
P O W ER
R EL AY
8 20
L L
BJ1 1 2
3 ID2 3 II2
1 1
A A W−B L− B
1
L−B L−B L− B
J2 B 4 BJ1 I3
JU NC TIO N
CO NN EC TO R
L−B
L−B
P 6
PO W ER W IN DOW M AS TE R SW 7 8
BW BW1
FR O NT LH FR O NT RH
DOWN
DOWN
UP
UP
+
−
+
−
W IND OW
LO C K S W
LO C K
E1 E FL U F LD N O RM AL FRU F RD
L− B
2 1 6 13 12 5
W −B
W −B
W −B
R− G
B− G
R− G
R −B
2 BJ1 5 BJ 1
B 2
R− G
B− O
L− B
2 BK1 5 BK 1 1 BK1
W −B
W −B
R
B
B− O
R− G
L −B
W−B 2 3 5
PO W ER W IND O W S W
I12
D OW N
FRO N T R H
1 1 B J1
UP
W −B
P11
D OO R C O UR TES Y SW
D OO R C O UR TES Y SW
1 4
W−B
1 1
R
B
FRO N T RH
FRO N T LH
3 1 3 1
M M
D 16
D 17
ID IE P 7 P 8
P OEW R W IN DO W M OTO R PO W E R W IND O W M O TO R
FRO NT LH FRO N T R H
108
L− B
P 6
PO W E R W INDO W M ASTER SW
R E AR R H R EAR L H
DOWN
DOWN
UP
RR U RRD RL UUP R LD
11 14 10 9
B− Y
R−Y
R−L
B−L
12 B J1 15 BJ1 16 B J1 1 7 B J1
L− B
R−Y
B −Y
B−L
R− L
L− B L−B
I2 I2
L− B
L− B
2 II1 1 II1 3 II1 5 ID1 11 ID 1 1 ID 1

B−Y
R− Y
R−L
B− L
L− B
L− B
2 BP1 1 BP1 3 B P1 2 BN1 1 BN 1 3 BN 1

B− L
R −L
B− L
R −L
L−B L−B
2 3 5 2 3 5
P1 3 P 12
PO W E R W IN D O W S W P O W E R W IN DO W S W
DO W N
DO W N
RE AR R H R EA R LH
UP
UP
1 4 1 4
R
R
B
2 1 2 1
M M
P1 0 P 9
PO W ER W IN D O W M O TO R P O W ER W IND O W M O TO R
REA R RH R EAR L H
109
POWER WINDOW
SYSTEM OUTLINE
WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS THROUGH THE GAUGE FUSE TO TERMINAL 3 OF THE POWER RELAY
→ TERMINAL 1 → GROUND. THIS ACTIVATES THE RELAY AND THE CURRENT FROM FL POWER FUSE FLOWS TO TERMINAL 4 OF
THE POWER RELAY → TERMINAL 2 → TERMINALS 7 AND 8 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW, TO TERMINAL 5 OF THE POWER
WINDOW SW FRONT RH, REAR LH AND REAR RH.
1. MANUAL UP OPERATION (DRIVER’S SIDE)

WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON AND WITH THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW (MANUAL SW) AT UP POSITION, THE CURRENT
FLOWS TO TERMINALS 7 AND 8 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW → TERMINAL 6 → TERMINAL 3 OF THE POWER WINDOW
MOTOR FRONT LH → TERMINAL 1 → TERMINAL 13 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW → TERMINALS 2 AND 1 → GROUND,
CAUSING THE POWER WINDOW MOTOR TO ROTATE IN THE UP DIRECTION. THE WINDOW ASCENDS ONLY WHILE THE POWER
WINDOW MASTER SW IS BEING PULLED.
IN DOWN OPERATION, THE CURRENT FLOW TO TERMINALS 7 AND 8 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW → TERMINAL 13 →
TERMINAL 1 OF THE POWER WINDOW MOTOR FRONT LH → TERMINAL 3 → TERMINAL 6 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW →
TERMINALS 2 AND 1 → GROUND. ACCORDING TO THE FLOW, THE MOTOR ROTATES IN THE DOWN DIRECTION, LOWERING THE
WINDOW.
2. AUTO DOWN OPERATION (DRIVER’S SIDE)

WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND WITH THE AUTO DOWN SW OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW IN DOWN POSITION, THE
CURRENT FLOWS TO TERMINAL 7 AND 8 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW → TERMINAL 13 → TERMINAL 1 OF THE POWER
WINDOW MOTOR FRONT LH → TERMINAL 3 → TERMINAL 6 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW → TERMINALS 1 AND 2 →
GROUND, CAUSING THE MOTOR TO ROTATE TOWARDS THE DOWN SIDE.
THEN THE SOLENOID IN THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW IS ACTIVATED AND IT LOCKS THE AUTO SW BEING PUSHED, CAUSING
THE MOTOR TO CONTINUE TO ROTATE IN AUTO DOWN OPERATION.
WHEN THE WINDOW HAS COMPLETELY DESCENDED, THE CURRENT BETWEEN TERMINAL 6 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW
AND TERMINALS 1 AND 2 INCREASES. AS A RESULT, THE SOLENOID STOPS OPERATING, AUTO DOWN SW TURNS OFF, AND THE
CURRENT FROM TERMINALS 7 AND 8 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW TO TERMINAL 13 IS CUT OFF, STOPPING THE MOTOR
SO THAT AUTO STOP OCCURS.
3. STOPPING OF AUTO DOWN AT DRIVER’S WINDOW

WHEN THE MANUAL SW (DRIVER’S) IS PUSHED TO THE UP SIDE DURING AUTO DOWN OPERATION, A GROUND CIRCUIT OPENS IN
THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW AND THE CURRENT DOES NOT FLOW FROM TERMINAL 6 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW
TO GROUND, SO THE MOTOR STOPS, CAUSING AUTO DOWN OPERATION TO STOP. IF THE MANUAL SW IS PUSHED
CONTINUOUSLY, THE MOTOR ROTATES IN THE UP DIRECTION IN MANUAL UP OPERATION.
4. MANUAL OPERATION BY POWER WINDOW SW (PASSENGER’S SIDE)

WITH THE POWER WINDOW SW (PASSENGER’S) PULLED TO THE UP SIDE, THE CURRENT FROM TERMINAL 5 OF THE POWER
WINDOW SW FRONT RH FLOWS TO TERMINAL 1 OF THE POWER WINDOW SW → TERMINAL 3 OF THE POWER WINDOW MOTOR →
TERMINAL 1 → TERMINAL 4 OF THE POWER WINDOW SW → TERMINAL 3 → TERMINAL 5 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW →
TERMINALS 1 AND 2 → GROUND, CAUSING THE POWER WINDOW MOTOR FRONT RH (PASSENGER’S) TO ROTATE IN THE UP
DIRECTION. UP OPERATION CONTINUES ONLY WHILE THE POWER WINDOW SW IS PULLED TO THE UP SIDE. WHEN THE WINDOW
DESCENDS, THE CURRENT TO THE MOTOR FLOWS IN THE OPPOSITE DIRECTION, FROM TERMINAL 1 TO TERMINAL 3, AND THE
MOTOR ROTATES IN REVERSE.
WHEN THE WINDOW LOCK SW IS PUSHED OUT TO THE NORMAL SIDE, THE GROUND CIRCUIT TO THE PASSENGER’S WINDOW
BECOMES OPEN.
AS A RESULT, EVEN IF OPEN/CLOSE OPERATION OF THE PASSENGER’S WINDOW IS TRIED, THE CURRENT FROM TERMINALS 1
AND 2 OF THE POWER WINDOW MASTER SW IS NOT GROUNDED AND THE MOTOR DOES NOT ROTATE, SO THE PASSENGER’S
WINDOW CANNOT BE OPERATED AND WINDOW LOCK OCCURS.
FURTHERMORE REAR LH, RH WINDOW OPERATE THE SAME AS THE ABOVE OPERATION.
5. KEY OFF POWER WINDOW OPERATION

WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED FROM ON TO OFF, THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY OPERATES AND KEEPS THE CURRENT
FLOW FROM FL POWER FUSE TO TERMINAL 8 OF THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY → TERMINAL 15 → TERMINAL 3 OF THE
POWER RELAY → TERMINAL 1 → GROUND FOR ABOUT 60 SECONDS. THE SAME AS NORMAL OPERATION, THE CURRENT FLOWS
FROM FL POWER FUSE TO TERMINAL 4 OF THE POWER RELAY → TERMINAL 2 → TERMINAL 7 AND 8 OF THE POWER WINDOW
MASTER SW, TO TERMINAL 5 OF THE POWER WINDOW SW FRONT RH. AS A RESULT, FOR ABOUT 60 SECONDS AFTER THE
IGNITION SW IS TURNED OFF, IT IS POSSIBLE TO RAISE AND LOWER THE WINDOW BY THE FUNCTIONING OF THIS RELAY. ALSO, BY
OPENING THE FRONT DOOR (THE DOOR COURTESY SW ON) WITHIN ABOUT 60 SECONDS AFTER TURNING THE IGNITION SW TO
OFF, A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL 2 OR 14 OF DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY. AS A RESULT, THE RELAY TURNS OFF, AND UP
AND DOWN MOVEMENT OF THE WINDOW STOPS.
110
SERVICE HINTS
P 6 POWER WINDOW MASTER SW
7, 8-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION OR KEY OFF OPERATED
1, 2-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY
6-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND MASTER SW (DRIVER’S WINDOW) AT UP POSITION
13-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND MASTER SW (DRIVER’S WINDOW) AT DOWN OR
AUTO DOWN POSITION
WINDOW LOCK SW
OPEN WITH THE WINDOW LOCK SW AT LOCK POSITION
: PARTS LOCATION
D16 26 J2 25 P10 27
D17 26 P6 27 P11 27
D22 26 P7 27 P12 27
F11 25 P8 27 P13 27
J1 25 P9 27
: RELAY BLOCKS

ID1
32 COWL WIRE AND FLOOR NO
NO. 1 WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)
ID2
II1
NO 2 WIRE (RIGHT KICK PANEL)
II2
BJ1
34 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)
BJ2
: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
I2 B2
36 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE
I3 32 COWL WIRE B4
I12
111
DOOR LOCK CONTROL

FRO M POW ER SO URC E SYSTEM (SEE PAG E 52)
1 3
3 0A FL POW ER
10A G AUGE
F11
FUSE BL O C K
3 4
6
Y
G −O G− O
BJ2
15
RLY
I3
L
L O CK
TIM ER
2 0 BJ1
L
KEY O FF
G −O
8 B PO W ER W IN DO W
L
U NLO CK
TIM ER
1 1
3 4
POW ER
RELA Y
IG KSW L1 UL1 L2 UL2

1 2
1 7 10 11 12 9 D22
1 1 DO O R L O CK C ONTRO L REL AY
G−R
L− B
L− Y
19
R−B
L− B
W−B
Y
L− B
B 4 BJ1
L− Y 3 L−Y
B4 BJ2
L −B
G −R 7 G−R
J1 8 B J2 4 BJ1
B 5 BJ2
JU NCTIO N
CO NNEC TO R
Y A A Y 1 7 BK1 1 8 B K1 20 BK1
R−B
L −Y
G− R
G−Y
L− B
L− Y
[P O W ER W INDO W M ASTER SW ]
D O OR LO CK CO NT ROL SW LH
L −B
B 7
G −R
FR OM SEAT BEL T R−B

I7
L −Y
W ARNIN G RELAY
L−Y
D O OR KEY L O CK A ND
D O OR KEY L O CK A ND
R− B
4 3 1 2 1 2 2 3
C O NTR OL SW R H
U NLO CK SW RH
U NLO CK SW L H
UNLO CK
UNLO CK
UNLO CK
UNLO CK
D O OR LO CK
A 10
LO CK
LO CK
LO CK
LO CK
J2
JU NCTIO N I12
C O N NEC TO R U NLO CK
D20
D21
D23
P 6
A W ARN IN G S W 1 3 3 4
[IGN ITIO N S W ]
W −B
W −B
W −B
9
W−B W−B W −B
W−B
B2 B 6 B6
W −B
W−B
W−B
A
J7 W−B W −B
JUN CTIO N
CO NNECTO R 1 1 BJ1
A 11 BK1
J8
JUNC TION
W−B
CO NN ECTOR
A A
I12
W −B
W −B
W −B W−B W−B
ID IE
112
R− B
R −G
3
R−B R− B
ID2 E23 I5
1
R −G
R −G
R− B
D 16
D O O R CO UR TESY
S W FRON T L H 3 B J1 5 BJ2 3 II2
R− G
R−L
FRO M D IO D E
D22 (IN TE RIO R L IG H T)
R −G
D O O R L O CK CO N TRO L R E LAY 2 14
DO O R C O UR TES Y
D CTY PCTY
1
SW FR O NT R H
D17
DO U BLE
O PER ATIO N
CIRC UIT S EC UR ITY
E L SW D AC T− AC T+ L SW P L−R
16 6 3 4 5
L−O
L −R
3 BR 2
13 7
L− R L−R L−R L −R
B 5 B J1 I5 ID 1 B1 4
L−R
L− R
11
2 BJ2 L−R
L −R
I1 4 II1
1 BS1
W −B
L− W
L− O
L− R
L− R
L− R
LG
L−R
1 2 BK 1 3 BK 1 7 BP1 7 B N1 3 BT1
L−O
L−R
DO O R LO C K M O TO R
DO O R LO C K M O TO R
L−R
L−R
L−R
D O O R L O CK M O TOR
D O O R L O CK M O TOR
A ND D O O R U N LO C K
A ND D O O R U N LO C K
1 2 1 2
L O CK M O TO R
2 2 2
D ETECTION SW
D ETECTION SW
B ACK DO O R
RE AR R H
RE AR L H
FRO NT RH
M M M
FRO NT LH
M M
D2 7
D2 6
B 7
4 4 4
D24
D25
L−W
3 4 3 4
L− W
L− W
W−B W −B
L−W
L− W
4 BK 1 8 BP1 8 B N1 1 BT1
W −B
L− W
W−B
L− W
B2 B 3
L−W
12
L−W 3 BS1
L−W
I1 4 II1
L −W
L−W
14 BJ1
L− W
4 BR 2
8
L− W L−W L−W
I1 1 ID 1 B1 4
L−W
113
DOOR LOCK CONTROL

SYSTEM OUTLINE
CURRENT ALWAYS FLOWS TO TERMINAL 8 OF THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY THROUGH FL POWER FUSE.
WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS TO TERMINAL 1 OF THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY THROUGH
GAUGE FUSE.
1. MANUAL LOCK OPERATION

TO CHANGE THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL SW OR KEY LOCK AND UNLOCK SW TO LOCK POSITION, A LOCK SIGNAL IS INPUT TO
TERMINALS 10 OR 12 OF THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY, CAUSING THE RELAY TO FUNCTION. THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM
TERMINAL 8 OF THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY TO TERMINAL 4 → TERMINAL 4 OF THE DOOR LOCK MOTORS → TERMINAL 2 →
TERMINAL 3 OF THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY → TERMINAL 16 → GROUND, CAUSING DOORS TO LOCK.
2. MANUAL UNLOCK OPERATION

TO CHANGE THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL SW OR DOOR KEY LOCK AND UNLOCK SW TO UNLOCK POSITION, AN UNLOCK SIGNAL IS
INPUT TO TERMINALS 9 OR 11 OF THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY, CAUSING THE RELAY TO FUNCTION. THE CURRENT FLOWS
FROM TERMINAL 8 OF THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY → TERMINAL 3 → TERMINAL 2 OF THE DOOR LOCK MOTORS → TERMINAL 4
→ TERMINAL 4 OF THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY → TERMINAL 16 → GROUND, CAUSING DOORS TO UNLOCK.
3. DOUBLE OPERATION UNLOCK OPERATION

WHEN THE DOOR KEY LOCK AND UNLOCK SW (DRIVER’S) IS TURNED TO THE UNLOCK SIDE, ONLY THE DRIVER’S DOOR IS
MECHANICALLY UNLOCKED. TURNING THE DOOR KEY LOCK AND UNLOCK SW (DRIVER’S) TO THE UNLOCK SIDE CAUSES A
SIGNAL TO BE INPUT TO TERMINAL 9 OF THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY, AND IF THE SIGNAL IS INPUT AGAIN WITHIN 3
SECONDS BY TURNING THE SWITCH TO THE UNLOCK SIDE AGAIN, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 3 OF THE DOOR LOCK
CONTROL RELAY TO TERMINAL 2 OF THE DOOR LOCK MOTORS → TERMINAL 4 → TERMINAL 4 OF THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL
RELAY → TERMINAL 16 → GROUND, CAUSING THE DOOR LOCK MOTOR TO OPERATE TO UNLOCK THE DOORS.
4. IGNITION KEY REMINDER OPERATION

* OPERATING DOOR LOCK KNOB (OPERATION OF DOOR LOCK MOTORS)
WITH THE IGNITION KEY IN CYLINDER (UNLOCK WARNING SW ON), WHEN EITHER FRONT DOOR IS OPENED AND LOCKED USING
DOOR LOCK KNOB (DOOR LOCK MOTOR), THE DOOR IS LOCKED ONCE BUT EACH DOOR IS UNLOCKED SOON BY THE
FUNCTION OF THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY. AS A RESULT, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 8 OF THE DOOR LOCK
CONTROL RELAY → TERMINAL 3 → TERMINAL 2 OF THE DOOR LOCK MOTORS → TERMINAL 4 → TERMINAL 4 OF THE DOOR
LOCK CONTROL RELAY → TERMINAL 16 → GROUND, CAUSING ALL THE DOORS TO UNLOCK.
* OPERATING DOOR LOCK CONTROL SW OR DOOR KEY LOCK SW
WITH THE IGNITION KEY IN CYLINDER (UNLOCK WARNING SW ON), WHEN EITHER FRONT DOOR IS OPENED AND LOCKED USING
DOOR LOCK CONTROL SW OR KEY SW, THE DOOR IS LOCKED ONCE BUT EACH DOOR IS UNLOCK SOON BY THE FUNCTION OF
SW CONTAINED IN MOTORS, WHICH THE SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL 6 (DRIVER’S) OR 5 (PASSENGER’S) OF THE DOOR LOCK
CONTROL RELAY. ACCORDING TO THIS INPUT SIGNAL, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 8 OF THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL
RELAY TO TERMINAL 3 → TERMINAL 2 OF THE DOOR LOCK MOTORS → TERMINAL 4 → TERMINAL 4 OF THE DOOR LOCK
CONTROL RELAY → TERMINAL 16 → GROUND, CAUSING ALL THE DOORS TO UNLOCK.
* IN CASE OF KEY LESS LOCK
WITH THE IGNITION KEY IN THE CYLINDER (UNLOCK WARNING SW ON), WHEN THE UNLOCK FUNCTION IS DISTURBED MORE
THAN 0.2 SECOND, FOR EXAMPLE PUSHING THE DOOR LOCK KNOB ETC., THE DOOR HOLDS ON LOCK CONDITION. AFTER
CLOSING THE DOOR, THE DOOR COURTESY SW INPUTS THE SIGNAL INTO TERMINAL 2 OR 14 OF THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL
RELAY. BY THIS INPUT SIGNAL, THE ECU WORKS AND THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 8 OF THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL
RELAY → TERMINAL 3 → TERMINAL 2 OF THE DOOR LOCK MOTORS → TERMINAL 4 → TERMINAL 4 OF THE DOOR LOCK
CONTROL RELAY → TERMINAL 16 → GROUND, CAUSING ALL THE DOORS TO UNLOCK.
114
SERVICE HINTS
D22 DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY
2-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH DRIVER’S DOOR OPEN
3-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS 0.2 SECONDS WITH FOLLOWING OPERATION
* DOOR LOCK CONTROL SW UNLOCKED
* DOOR LOCK CONTROL SW LOCKED WITH THE IGNITION KEY IN CYLINDER AND DRIVER’S DOOR OPEN
(IGNITION KEY REMINDER FUNCTION)
* DOOR LOCK KNOB LOCKED WITH THE IGNITION KEY IN CYLINDER AND DRIVER’S DOOR OPEN
(IGNITION KEY REMINDER FUNCTION)
* UNLOCKING THE DRIVER’S, PASSENGER’S DOOR CYLINDER WITH KEY
4-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS 0.2 SECONDS WITH FOLLOWING OPERATION
* DOOR LOCK CONTROL SW LOCKED
* LOCKING THE DRIVER’S, PASSENGER’S DOOR CYLINDER WITH KEY
10-GROUND : 0 VOLTS WITH THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL SW LOCKED
14-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE PASSENGER’S DOOR OPEN
6-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE DRIVER’S DOOR LOCK KNOB UNLOCKED
5-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE PASSENGER’S DOOR LOCK KNOB UNLOCKED
11-GROUND : 0 VOLTS WITH THE DOOR LOCK CONTROL SW UNLOCKED, PASSENGER’S DOOR LOCK CYLINDER UNLOCKED
WITH KEY
9-GROUND : 0 VOLTS WITH THE DRIVER’S DOOR LOCK CYLINDER UNLOCKED WITH KEY
12-GROUND : 0 VOLTS WITH THE DRIVER’S, PASSENGER’S DOOR LOCK CYLINDER LOCKED WITH KEY
I12 UNLOCK WARNING SW [IGNITION SW]
10-9 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION KEY IN CYLINDER
D20, D21 DOOR KEY LOCK AND UNLOCK SW LH, RH
2-3 : CLOSED WITH THE DOOR LOCK CYLINDER UNLOCKED WITH KEY
1-3 : CLOSED WITH THE DOOR LOCK CYLINDER LOCKED WITH KEY
D16, D17 DOOR COURTESY SW FRONT LH, RH
1-GROUND : CLOSED WITH THE FRONT DOOR OPEN
: PARTS LOCATION
B7 26 D23 26 I12 25
D16 26 D24 26 J1 25
D17 26 D25 26 J2 25
D20 26 D26 26 J7 25
D21 26 D27 26 J8 25
D22 26 F11 25 P6 27
: RELAY BLOCKS

ID1
ID2
II1
II2
BJ1
34 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)
BJ2
: GROUND POINTS
115
DOOR LOCK CONTROL

: SPLICE POINTS
E23 30 B2
I3 B3
36 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE
I5 B4
I7 COWL WIRE B5
32
I11 B6
36 FRONT DOOR RH WIRE
I12 B7
116
AUTO ANTENNA
FRO M PO W ER SO U RC E SYSTEM ( S EE PAG E 5 2 )
1
15A CIG
F11
FU SE B LO CK
3
GR A A GR GR
IF1
J3
JU NC TIO N 4
C ON NEC TO R 4
2 W−B W −B
IF1
A21
D OW N
AUTO AN TE NN A UP
CO N TRO L S W
A
5 3
J8
JUN C T IO N
L −Y
L
C O NN EC TO R
A
12 IF1 13 IF1
W−B
L−Y
L
1 2
M
A 8 IE
A UTO ANTENN A
M O TO R
SERVICE HINTS
A21 AUTO ANTENNA SW
: PARTS LOCATION
A8 22 F11 25 J8 25
A21 24 J3 25

: GROUND POINTS
A 8 G R AY A21 BLA CK F 11 J3 J 8 B L UE
(S EE PAG E 2 0)
A A A A A
1
A A A A A A A A A A
2 2 3 4 5
A A A
(H IT : S EE PA G E 7 )
(HIN T : S EE PAG E 7 )
117
POWER SEAT
FRO M PO W ER SO UR C E SYSTEM (SEE PA GE 52 )
3
3 0 A F L P O W ER
F11
FUSE BL O CK
4
L
L L
I4
L
10 ID 2
L −B
1 Bc1
L−B
P1 4
10 PO W ER SE AT C O NTRO L SW (DR IVE R’ S SEA T)
SLID E R EC LIN IN G FR O NT V ER TICA L R EA R VER TIC AL L UM BA R SU PPO R T
DOWN
DOWN
R EAR
R EAR
R EAR
FRO N T
FRO N T
FRO N T
UP
UP
5 8 4 7 12 11 2 6 3 9 1
W−B
R− W
G−B
G−Y
R−B
R−Y
R− L
G−L
G
G
R
1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2
M M M M M
P20 P1 9 P1 6 P1 8 P 17 3 Bc1
PO W ER SEAT M O TO R PO W ER S EAT M O TO R PO W ER SE AT M O TO R PO W E R SEA T M O TO R P O W ER SE AT M O TO R
(DR IVER ’ S (D RIVER ’ S (DR IVE R’ S (D RIVER ’ S (D RIVE R’ S
SEAT SL ID E S E AT REC L IN IN G SEA T FRO NT S EAT RE AR SE AT L UM BAR
CO N TR OL ) C O N TROL ) VER TIC AL CO NTR OL ) V ERTICAL C O N TRO L ) SU PPO R T CON TRO L )
W −B
W−B
BF
118
6 II2
L −B
1 Bj1
L− B
P1 5
10 PO W ER SEAT C ONTRO L SW (PASSENG ER’ S SEAT)
SL IDE RECLINING FRO NT VERTICA L REAR V ER TICAL
DOW N
DOW N
REAR
REAR
FRON T
FRON T
UP
UP
5 9 8 4 7 12 11 2 6
W −B
R− B
G −B
R− Y
G −Y
G−L
R− L
G
R
1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2
M M M M
3 Bj1 P24 P23 P21 P22

PO W ER S EAT M OTOR PO W ER SEAT M O TO R POW ER SEAT M OTO R PO W ER SEAT M O TOR
(PASSENG ER’ S (PASSENGER’ S (PASSE NGER ’ S (PASSENGER’ S
S EAT SLIDE SEAT REC LIN ING S EAT FRO NT SEAT REAR
W −B
CO NTROL) CO NTROL) V ERTICAL CON TRO L) VERTICAL CO NTRO L)
3
W −B
BM 1
119
POWER SEAT
SERVICE HINTS
P14 POWER SEAT CONTROL SW (DRIVER’S SEAT)
10-5 : CLOSED WITH THE DRIVER’S SEAT AT FRONT SLIDE OPERATION
10-8 : CLOSED WITH THE DRIVER’S SEAT AT REAR SLIDE OPERATION
10-4 : CLOSED WITH THE DRIVER’S SEAT AT FRONT RECLINING OPERATION
10-7 : CLOSED WITH THE DRIVER’S SEAT AT REAR RECLINING OPERATION
10-12 : CLOSED WITH THE DRIVER’S SEAT AT FRONT VERTICAL UP OPERATION
10-11 : CLOSED WITH THE DRIVER’S SEAT AT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN OPERATION
10-2 : CLOSED WITH THE DRIVER’S SEAT AT REAR VERTICAL UP OPERATION
10-6 : CLOSED WITH THE DRIVER’S SEAT AT REAR VERTICAL DOWN OPERATION
10-3 : CLOSED WITH THE DRIVER’S SEAT AT LUMBAR SUPPORT FRONT OPERATION
10-1 : CLOSED WITH THE DRIVER’S SEAT AT LUMBAR SUPPORT REAR OPERATION
P15 POWER SEAT CONTROL SW (PASSENGER’S SEAT)
10-5 : CLOSED WITH THE PASSENGER’S SEAT AT FRONT SLIDE OPERATION
10-8 : CLOSED WITH THE PASSENGER’S SEAT AT REAR SLIDE OPERATION
10-4 : CLOSED WITH THE PASSENGER’S SEAT AT FRONT RECLINING OPERATION
10-7 : CLOSED WITH THE PASSENGER’S SEAT AT REAR RECLINING OPERATION
10-12 : CLOSED WITH THE PASSENGER’S SEAT AT FRONT VERTICAL UP OPERATION
10-11 : CLOSED WITH THE PASSENGER’S SEAT AT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN OPERATION
10-2 : CLOSED WITH THE PASSENGER’S SEAT AT REAR VERTICAL UP OPERATION
10-6 : CLOSED WITH THE PASSENGER’S SEAT AT REAR VERTICAL DOWN OPERATION
: PARTS LOCATION
F11 25 P17 28 P21 28
P14 28 P18 28 P22 28
P15 28 P19 28 P23 28
P16 28 P20 28 P24 28

BM1 34 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 1 WIRE (UNDER THE CENTER CONSOLE)
Bc1 38 FLOOR NO. 1 WIRE AND SEAT NO. 1 WIRE (UNDER THE DRIVER’S SEAT)
Bl1 38 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND SEAT NO. 1 WIRE (UNDER THE PASSENGER’S SEAT)
: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
I4 32 COWL WIRE
120
ABS
121
ABS
FR O M PO W ER SO U RC E SYS TEM (SEE P AG E 5 2)
60 A
ABS
B −W
2
2
B− W
E8
B−W
R −L
2 EA3 1 EA 3 20 IH1
B−W
B−W
R−L
A 6 A ,A 7 B
1 A AB S RE LA Y 2 B 4 B
A 4 A ,A5 B
6 GN D +BM +BS W
A BS A CTU ATO R
B
M
W−B
BS S FR SFL SR R A ST MT BM G ND
BM MR R− SR BS 4 A 1 B 4 B 3 B 2 B 5 B 3 A 1 A
2 A 4 A 3 A 1 B 5 B
B −L
W−B
L−W
B− R
L− R
L− Y
LG
L
B− R
G −Y
G −B
G
B− R
W −B
E2 3
23 B 24 B 11 B 1 B 13 B 26 B 18 B 6 B
MR R− SR SFR S FL S RR AS T MT
A1 2 A , A13 B
ABS E C U
GN D GND F L+ FL − F SS FR + F R−
2 B 15 B 9 B 22 B 10 B 16 B 3 B
BR
BR
BR
(SHIEL D ED) (SH IEL D ED )

I3
I3
V
2 Bd 1 4 Bd 1 1 Bd 1 3 Bd 1
W
B
W− B
BR
1 Be 1 2 Be 1
W
2 1 1 2
A 23 A24
A BS S PEED ABS S PEED
S EN SO R FR ON T SEN SO R FR O NT
LH RH
ID IE
122
FR OM PO W ER SO URC E SYSTEM (SEE PAG E 5 2)
1 1 1 1
1 5A ECU− IG
10 A STOP
10 A ECU−B
FUS E BLO CK
10 A GAUG E
F11
3 2 2 3
Y
CON NECTOR
R−L A
JUNCTIO N
CO NN ECTO R
B
15
J UN CTIO N
B−W
D 1 ID2
J1
DATA LIN K A
B− W
CO NN EC TOR 1 23
J6
B
Y
WB
CO M BINATIO N M ETER
5 A 4
G− O
B−R
C10 A , C 11 B
IG
TS TC WA E1 A22
ABS DECEL ER ATIO N SEN SOR
CENTER
16 11 22
LOCK
DIFF.
2 GS1 GS2 GS T G ND
ABS
GR− R
B− Y
3 2 1 6
O
STO P L IG HT SW
W−B
B− W
Y−R
Y− B
4 A 2 B
Y
P− B
13 IH 1 11 IH 1 23 IH1
P−B S13 14 ID3 13 ID 3 12 ID3
16
BR−B 1
O
P− B
G R− R
Y −R
B−Y
Y−B
I5
Y
G−W
TO CENTER
O
D FF. LOCK
NDICATOR SW
15 A 5 B 13 A 19 B 6 A 25 B 12 B 12 A 3 A 10 A
TS TC W EXI STP BAT +B GS1 G S2 G ST
A12 A , A13 B
ABS ECU
RL− R L+ RSS R R− RR + PKB
1 A 9 A 7 A 16 A 8 A 14 A
(SH IE LDED) (SHIEL D ED)

R−B
W
G
R
I3
2 ID 3 3 IDE 11 ID3 4 ID3 5 ID3 R−B

I6
(SH IE LDED) (SHIEL D ED) 1
W
G
R
B1
B RA K E FL UID
R −B
L EVEL
W ARN IN G SW
5 BQ2 4 BQ2 6 BQ2 2 BQ2 1 BQ2 2
W−B
BR−B
9 ID2
W−B
W
G
R
B3 1 A
J2
JUNCTION
R−W
CONNECTOR
4 Bh1 3 Bh1 5 Bh1 2 Bh1 1 Bh1 A
W−B

Y− G
W
1
B2 4 I12
1 Bf1 2 Bf1 1 Bg1 2 Bg1 P4
WB
PARKI NG
WB
BRAKE SW
1 2 1 2 ID IE EC BF
A2 5 A2 6
ABS SPEED SEN SOR ABS S PEED SENSO R
REAR L H R EAR RH
123
ABS
SYSTEM OUTLINE
THIS SYSTEM CONTROLS THE RESPECTIVE BRAKE FLUID PRESSURES ACTING ON THE DISC BRAKE CYLINDERS OF THE RIGHT FRONT
WHEEL. LEFT FRONT WHEEL AND REAR WHEELS WHEN THE BRAKES ARE APPLIED IN A PANIC STOP SO THAT THE WHEELS DO NOT
LOCK. THIS RESULTS IN IMPROVED DIRECTIONAL STABILITY AND STEERABILITY DURING PANIC BRAKING.
1. INPUT SIGNAL
(1) SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
THE TOP SPEED OF THE WHEELS IS DETECTED AND INPUT TO TERMINALS FL+, FR+, RL+ AND RR+ OF THE ABS ECU.
(2) STOP LIGHT SW SIGNAL
A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL STP OF THE ABS ECU WHEN BRAKE PEDAL IS DEPRESSED.
(3) PARKING BRAKE SW SIGNAL
A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL PKB OF THE ABS ECU WHEN THE PARKING BRAKE SW IS ON.
(4) DECELERATION SENSOR SIGNAL
THE DEGREE OF VEHICLE DECELERATION IS DETECTED AND INPUT TO TERMINAL GS1, GS2 AND GST OF THE ABS ECU.
(5) TRANSFER CONTROL SIGNAL
WHILE THE TRANSFER SHIFT LEVER IS IN L4 POSITION, THE CENTER DIFF. LOCK INDICATOR SW DETECTS A SIGNAL OF
CENTER DIFF. LOCK AND THE SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL EXI OF THE ABS ECU.
2. SYSTEM OPERATION
(TRANSFER L4 POSITION)
WHEN THE TRANSFER SHIFT LEVER IS MOVED TO L4 POSITION, THE CENTER DIFF. IS LOCKED, THEN THE ABS IS NOT IN
OPERATION AND THE ABS WARNING LIGHT IS LIGHTED UP.
(TRANSFER EXCEPT L4 POSITION)
DURING SUDDEN BRAKING, THE ABS ECU WHICH HAS SIGNALS INPUT FROM EACH SENSOR, CONTROLS THE CURRENT TO THE
SOLENOID INSIDE THE ACTUATOR, AND CAUSES THE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE ACTING ON EACH WHEEL CYLINDER ESCAPE TO THE
RESERVOIR. THE PUMP INSIDE THE ACTUATOR IS ALSO OPERATING AT THIS TIME, AND IT RETURNS THE BRAKE FLUID FROM THE
RESERVOIR TO THE MASTER CYLINDER, PREVENTING LOCKING OF THE VEHICLE WHEELS. IF THE ECU JUDGES THAT THE HYDRAULIC
PRESSURE ACTING ON THE WHEEL CYLINDER IS INSUFFICIENT, THE CURRENT ACTING ON THE SOLENOID IS CONTROLLED AND THE
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE IS INCREASED. HOLDING OF THE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE IS ALSO CONTROLLED BY THE ECU, BY THE SAME
METHOD AS ABOVE. BY REPEATED PRESSURE, REDUCTION, HOLDING AND INCREASED ARE REPEATED TO MAINTAIN VEHICLE
STABILITY AND IMPROVE STEERABILTY DURING SUDDEN BRAKING.
SERVICE HINTS
A12 (A) , A13 (B) ABS ECU
(CONNECTOR THE ECU CONNECTOR)
(A) 15-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION AND THE DATA LINK CONNECTOR 1 TS-E1
NOT CONNECTED
(B) 5-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION AND THE DATA LINK CONNECTOR 1 TC-E1
NOT CONNECTED
(B) 1-GROUND :
(B) 6-GROUND :
(B) 18-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION AND THE ABS WARNING LIGHT GOES OFF
(B) 26-GROUND :
(B) 13-GROUND :
(B) 2-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY
(B) 15-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY
(B) 12-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION
(A) 6-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL DEPRESSED
(B) 25-GROUND : ALWAYS APPROX. 12 VOLTS
(A) 14-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING AND PARKING BRAKE LEVER RELEASED OR BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL WARNING SW ON
(DISCONNECT THE ECU CONNECTOR)
(B) 1-(B) 18 : APPROX. 6 Ω
(B) 13-(B) 18 : APPROX. 6 Ω
(B) 26-(B) 18 : APPROX. 6 Ω
(B) 9-(B) 22 : 0.9-1.8 KΩ
(B) 16-(B) 3 : 0.9-1.8 KΩ
(B) 11- (B) 24 : 60-100 Ω
(B) 23-(B) 24 : 50-80 Ω
(A) 1-(A) 9 : 0.5-1.6 KΩ
(A) 16-(A) 8 : 0.5-1.6 KΩ
124
: PARTS LOCATION
A4 A 22 A23 26 D1 22
A5 B 22 A24 26 F11 25
A6 A 22 A25 26 J1 25
A7 B 22 A26 26 J2 25
A12 A 24 B1 22 J6 25
A13 B 24 C10 A 24 P4 27
A22 26 C11 B 24 S13 25
: RELAY BLOCKS

ID2
ID3
Bd1 36 COWL WIRE AND SPEED CONTROL SENSOR NO. 1 WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)
Be1 36 SPEED SENSOR NO. 2 WIRE AND SPEED SENSOR NO. 1 WIRE (FRONT AXLE HOUSING LH)
Bf1 36 FRAME NO. 2 WIRE AND SPEED SENSOR NO. 3 WIRE (REAR AXLE HOUSING LH)
Bg1 36 FRAME NO. 2 WIRE AND SPEED SENSOR NO. 4 WIRE (REAR AXLE HOUSING RH)
Bh1 36 FLOOR NO. 3 WIRE AND FRAME NO. 2 WIRE (LEFT QUARTER PANEL INNER)
: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
32 COWL WIRE
E23 30 I12
I3 COWL WIRE B24 36 FLAME NO. 2 WIRE
32
125
CRUISE CONTROL
SYSTEM OUTLINE
WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS THROUGH GAUGE FUSE TO TERMINAL 5 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR LIGHT. THE CURRENT THROUGH ECU-IG FUSE FLOWS TO TERMINAL 14 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU.
WHEN THE IGNITION SW IS ON AND THE CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SW IS TURNED ON, A SIGNAL IS INPUT FROM TERMINAL 15 OF
THE CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SW TO TERMINAL4 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU. AS A RESULT, THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU
FUNCTIONS AND THE CURRENT TO TERMINAL 14 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU FLOWS TO TERMINAL 13 OF THE CRUISE
CONTROL ECU → GROUND, AND THE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM IS IN A CONDITION READY FOR OPERATION.
AT THE SAME TIME, THE CURRENT FROM THE GAUGE FUSE FLOWS TO TERMINAL 5 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR LIGHT
→ TERMINAL 9 → TERMINAL 5 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU → TERMINAL 13 → GROUND, CAUSING THE CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR LIGHT TO LIGHT UP TO INDICATE THAT THE CRUISE CONTROL IS READY FOR OPERATION.
1. SET OPERATION
WHEN THE CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SW IS TURNED ON AND THE SET SW IS PUSHED WITH THE VEHICLE SPEED WITHIN THE SET
LIMIT (APPROX. 36 KM/H, 22 MPH TO 200 KM/H, 124 MPH), A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL 18 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU AND
THE VEHICLE SPEED AT THE TIME THE SET SW IS RELEASED IS MEMORIZED IN THE ECU AS THE SET SPEED.
2. SET SPEED CONTROL
DURING CRUISE CONTROL DRIVING, THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU COMPARES THE SET SPEED MEMORIZED IN THE CRUISE
CONTROL ECU WITH THE ACTUAL VEHICLE SPEED INPUT INTO TERMINAL 20 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU FROM THE
COMBINATION METER, AND CONTROLS THE CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR TO MAINTAIN THE SET SPEED.
WHEN THE ACTUAL SPEED IS LOWER THAN THE SET SPEED, THE ECU CAUSES THE CURRENT TO THE CRUISE CONTROL
ACTUATOR TO FLOW FROM TERMINAL 12 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU → TERMINAL 6 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR →
TERMINAL 7 → TERMINAL 11 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU. AS A RESULT, THE MOTOR IN THE CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR IS
ROTATED TO OPEN THE THROTTLE VALVE, AND THE THROTTLE CABLE IS PULLED TO INCREASE THE VEHICLE SPEED. WHEN THE
ACTUAL DRIVING SPEED IS HIGHER THAN THE SET SPEED, THE CURRENT TO CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR FLOWS FROM
TERMINAL 11 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU → TERMINAL 7 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR → TERMINAL 6 → TERMINAL
12 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU.
THIS CAUSES THE MOTOR IN THE CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR TO ROTATE TO CLOSE THE THROTTLE VAVLE AND RETURN THE
THROTTLE CABLE TO DECREASE THE VEHICLE SPEED.
3. COAST CONTROL
DURING CRUISE CONTROL DRIVING, WHILE THE COAST SW IS ON, THE CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR RETURNS THE THROTTLE
CABLE TO CLOSE THE THROTTLE VALVE AND DECREASE THE DRIVING SPEED. THE VEHICLE SPEED WHEN THE COAST SWITCH
IS TURNED OFF IS MEMORIZED, AND THE VEHICLE CONTINUES AT THE NEW SET SPEED.
4. ACCEL CONTROL
DURING CRUISE CONTROL DRIVING, WHILE THE ACCEL SW IS TURNED ON, THE CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR PULLS THE
THROTTLE CABLE TO OPEN THE THROTTLE VALVE AND INCREASE THE DRIVING SPEED. THE VEHICLE SPEED WHEN THE ACCEL
SW IS TURNED OFF IS MEMORIZED, AND THE VEHICLE CONTINUES AT THE NEW SET SPEED.
5. RESUME CONTROL
UNLESS THE VEHICLE SPEED FALLS BELOW THE MINIMUM SPEED LIMIT (APPROX. 40 KM/H, 25 MPH) AFTER CANCELING THE SET
SPEED BY THE CANCEL SW, PUSHING THE RESUME SW WILL CAUSE THE VEHICLE TO RESUME THE SPEED SET BEFORE
CANCELLATION.
6. MANUAL CANCEL MECHANISM
IF ANY OF THE FOLLOWING OPERATIONS OCCURS DURING CRUISE CONTROL OPERATION, THE MAGNETIC CLUTCH OF THE
ACTUATOR MOTOR TURNS OFF, THE MOTOR ROTATES TO CLOSE THE THROTTLE VALVE, AND THE CRUISE CONTROL IS
RELEASED.
∗ PLACING THE IGNITION SW AT ST POSITION. “SIGNAL INPUT TO TERMINAL 2 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU”
∗ DEPRESSING BRAKE PEDAL (STOP LIGHT SW ON). “SIGNAL INPUT TO TERMINAL 16 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU”
∗ PUSH THE CANCEL SW (CANCEL SW ON). “SIGNAL INPUT TO TERMINAL 18 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU”
∗ PUSH THE MAIN SWITCH (MAIN SW OFF) “SIGNAL INPUT TO TERMINAL 4 OF THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU”
126
7. AUTO CANCEL FUNCTION

A) IF ANY OF THE FOLLOWING OPERATING CONDITIONS OCCURS DURING CRUISE CONTROL OPERATION, THE SET SPEED IS
ERASED, THE CURRENT FLOW TO MAGNETIC CLUTCH IS STOPPED, AND THE CRUISE CONTROL IS RELEASED. (MAIN SW TURNS
OFF).
WHEN THIS OCCURS, THE IGNITION SW MUST BE TURNED OFF ONCE BEFORE THE MAIN SWITCH WILL TURN ON.
∗ OVER CURRENT TO TRANSISTER DRIVING MOTOR AND/OR MAGNETIC CLUTCH.
∗ WHEN CURRENT CONTINUED TO FLOW TO THE MOTOR INSIDE THE ACTUATOR IN THE THROTTLE VALVE “OPEN” DIRECTION.
∗ OPEN CIRCUIT IN MAGNETIC CLUTCH.
∗ MOMENTARY INTERRUPTION OF VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL.
∗ SHORT CIRCUIT IN CRUISE CONTROL SW.
∗ MOTOR DOES NOT OPERATE DESPITE THE MOTOR DRIVE SIGNAL BEING OUTPUT.
B) IF ANY OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS OCCURS DURING CRUISE CONTROL OPERATION, THE SET SPEED IS ERASED, AND
THE CRUISE CONTROL IS RELEASED. (THE POWER OF MAGNETIC CLUTCH IS CUT OFF UNTIL THE SET SW IS “ON” AGAIN.)
∗ WHEN THE VEHICLE SPEED FALLS BELOW THE MINIMUM SPEED LIMIT, APPROX. 40 KM/H (25 MPH)
∗ WHEN THE VEHICLE SPEED FALLS MORE THAN 16 KM/H (10 MPH) BELOW THE SET SPEED, E.G. ON AN UPWARD SLOPE.
∗ WHEN POWER TO THE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM IS MOMENTARILY CUT OFF.
8. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CONTROL FUNCTION

∗ IN OVERDRIVE, IF THE VEHICLE SPEED BECOMES LOWER THAN THE OVERDRIVE CUT SPEED (SET SPEED MINUS APPROX. 4
KM/H, 2.5 MPH) DURING CRUISE CONTROL OPERATION, SUCH AS DRIVING UP A HILL, THE OVERDRIVE IS RELEASED AND THE
POWER INCREASED TO PREVENT A REDUCTION IN VEHICLE SPEED.
∗ AFTER RELEASING THE OVERDRIVE, VEHICLE SPEED BECOMES HIGHER THAN THE OVERDRIVE RETURN SPEED (SET SPEED
MINUS APPROX. 2 KM/H, 1.2 MPH), THE ECU JUDGES BY THE SIGNALS FROM POTENTIONMETER OF THE ACTUATOR THAT THE
UPWARD SLOPE HAS FINISHED, AND OVERDRIVE IS RESUMED AFTER APPROXIMATELY 6 SECONDS.
∗ DURING CRUISE CONTROL DRIVING, THE CRUISE CONTROL OPERATION SIGNAL IS OUTPUT FROM THE CRUISE CONTROL ECU
TO THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE ECU UPON RECEIVING THIS SIGNAL, SO THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE ECU CHANGES THE
SHIFT PATTERN TO NORMAL.
TO MAINTAIN SMOOTH CRUISE CONTROL OPERATION (ON A DOWNWARD SLOPE, ETC.), LOCK-UP RELEASE OF THE
TRANSMISSION WHEN THE IDLING POINT OF THE THROTTLE POSITION IS “ON” IS FORBIDDEN.
SERVICE HINTS
C4 CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1-3 : APPROX. 2 KΩ
5-4 : APPROX. 38.5 Ω
C17 CRUISE CONTROL ECU
20-GROUND : 4 PULSE WITH 1 ROTATION OF ROTOR SHAFT
18-GROUND : APPROX. 418 Ω WITH THE CANCEL SW ON IN THE CONTROL SW
APPROX. 68 Ω WITH THE RES/ACC SW ON IN THE CONTROL SW
APPROX. 198 Ω WITH THE SET/COAST SW ON IN THE CONTROL SW
4-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE MAIN SW ON IN THE CONTROL SW
127
CRUISE CONTROL
FR O M PO W ER SO UR C E SYS TEM (SEE PA G E 52 )
1 1 1 1 4
AM 1
1 0 A G A UG E
1 0 A E CU − B
15 A E CU −IG
I1 2
1 0 A S TO P
F1 1
IG NIT IO N
FU SE SW
B LO C K
ST1
AC C
G1
3 3 2 2 1
B− W
Y
G −O
A
J1
JU NC TIO N
E 4 A ,E 5 C ,E 7 D C ON NE CT O R
D ATA L IN K CO N NEC TO R 1
C O M BIN ATIO N M ETE R

E NG INE C O NTR O L M O D UL E
Y
J6 B
C R UIS E CO N TOR L
5
IND ICA TO R LIGH T

JU NCTIO N
[CO M B. M ETER]
CO NN EC TO R
OD1
ID L
S2
TC S PD
B
11 18 D 9 A 11 C 3
C1 3
G−W
R− Y
B− Y
C 10
D 1
11 IH 1 15 IH2 19 IH 1
G−O
B −W
B− W
G−Y
B− R
L −W
G −W
G −R
B −Y
14 8 9 22 23 5 15 20 2
B TC OD ECT IDL PI B ATT S PD N& C
GND CMS CCS VR3 V R2 VR1 MC MO L STP−

13 4 C1 7 18 26 25 24 11 12 10 16
CR UISE CO NTR OL ECU
G−W
R
C RUIS E C O N TRO L STO P SW
3 2
[ST OP L IG HT SW ]
B− G
Y− G
Y−R
Y− L
L −R
BR
S1 3
4 1
R −G
G−W
15 5 3 2 1 7 6 5 I1
CMS C CS
C ANC EL
R ES UM E /
C O AST
A CC EL
M A IN
SET/
G −W
EP
M
C15 20
C RU ISE C ON TR O L SW
[C O M B. SW ]
BR
C 4 4
C R UISE CO N TRO L AC TUA TO R
W −B
A
TO S TO P L IG HTS
BR W −B W−B A
I5 I12
J2
J UNC TIO N
W−B
C O NN EC TO R
BR
ID IE
128
: PARTS LOCATION
C4 22 D1 22 I12 25
C10 24 E4 A 24 J1 25
C13 24 E5 C 24 J2 25
C15 24 E7 D 24 J6 25
C17 24 F11 25 S13 25

IH1
IH2
: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
I1 I12 32 COWL WIRE
32 COWL WIRE
I5
C 4 GRAY C 10 G RAY C1 3
5 9 3 X
1 2
3 4 5
6 7
C1 5 BL AC K C 17 G RAY D 1 BL ACK
X 5 X X
X 2 X 4 5 X X 8 9 10 1 1 12 1 3
X X X 15 X X 20 X X X X X
14 15 16 26
X 18 X 20 X 2 2 23 2 4 25
X
X X X 11 X
X X X X X
E 4 A D AR K G RAY E 5 C DA RK G RAY E 7 D DAR K GR AY F11
(S EE PAG E 20 )
9 X
X 11 X 18
I1 2 BLACK J1 J2 BLU E J6 S1 3 BLA CK
A A A A A
1 4 A A A A A A A A A A B B
X A A A B B B B B 1 2
(H INT : SEE PAG E 7) 3 4
(HIN T : S EE PAGE 7 ) (HINT : SEE PA GE 7)
129
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION

Y
W
A CC
4 AM1 IG 1 2 B−Y B− Y
S T1 1 B−W
W
Y
11 AM2 IG 2 6 B −R B−R
FR O M P O W E R S O U R CE SYS TEM
W −R
(S EE P A GE 5 2)
I1 2 3 E C1
IG N ITIO N S W 1
3 EA 3 6 E A2 3 EA2 1
1 0A S TO P
F11
Y
15 A
W −R
EFI FU SE
B
BLOCK
2
2 T 2
2 2 T R A NS FER L 4
2 P O SITIO N SW
2
G−O
R−Y
B− L
50A 2 2
AM1 2
3 2 1 EB1
R
STO P LIG HT
1 4 E C1
EFI M A IN
Y− R
Y− R
RE L AY
B− L
S1 3
SW
1 4
7 EA2 22 IH 1 1 24 IH1
2 2
W
BR
G−W
B−W
B−L
Y
2 3 D 12 D 22 D 14 D 9 D
M RL Y +B NSW S TP L4
3
O D1 SP 2 + SP 2 − S1 S2 SL
W−R
B−L
18 D 2 B 8 B 10 A 9 A 8 A
E 4 A ,E 5 C ,E 6 B ,E 7 D
E NG IN E C O N TR O L M O D U LE
V−G
R−Y
R− L
R
V
C
1 C 1 A 1 B
B ,F 8
F L AM 1 1 . 2 5B
FL M A IN 2 . 0L
5 E C2 4 EC2 1 EC2 2 EC 2 3 EC 2
F L AM 2 0 . 3P
FUS IBL E LIN K
A ,F 7
G−O
V− G
R− Y
R −L
BR
R
V
(EL EC TR O N IC A LL Y CO N TRO L LE D
F6
1 2 3
V E HIC L E S PE ED SEN SO R
1
NO. 1
NO. 2
NO. 3
TR AN S M IS SIO N)
B ATTE RY 9
OD 2 E 2
V 2
EL EC TR O N ICA L LY
C1 7 C O N TR O L L ED
TR AN SM IS SIO N
CR U IS E C ON TR O L
EC U SO L EN O ID
EB
130
AND A/T INDICATOR
Y Y
E18
Y
B− Y
I4
6 IH1
Y
B− Y
B− Y
1 1 1
B− R
15A ECU−IG
1 0A G AUGE
Y
7 . 5 A IGN
F11
FUSE BL OCK
J4
JUNCTIO N P− B
I12
2 3 3 CO NNEC TOR
Y B B
B−W
JUN CTIO N CONNECTOR
JUN CTIO N CONNECTOR

Y
B A
A Y
P− B
B A
B− W
Y
B− L
J6
J1
15 ID2 1 ID3 L−W

16 ID 2
B−W
3 2
2˙
P −B
E9
ELECTR ONICALL Y CO NTRO LLED
PW R TRAN SMISSIO N PATTERN
SELECT SW
P− B
5 6
6 11
BR O O
ID3 IH 2
1 D 3 A 20 D 8 D
IG SW HO LD PW R SPD
E4 A ,E 5 C ,E6 B ,E 7 D
ENG IN E CO NTRO L M O DULE
THG TH W O IL E2 ID L VTA VCC E0 3 E02 E01 E1

19 A 4 C 12 C 9 C 11 C 10 C 1 C 16 A 26 A 13 A 24 A
BR
BR
BR
R− W
R− W
G −Y
I18
TEM P. SENSO R
E NGINE CO OLA NT
1 2 2
TEM P. SENSO R
TEM P. SENSO R
BR− B
G −W
R− G
G −B
B R−B
BR
E GR GAS
A /T FLUID
E 1
E3
A3
2 1 1 I18
BR −B
BR
BR−B
BR−B
2 3 4
E16
IDL VTA VC
T1
BR− B
THR OTTL E
PO S ITIO N
SEN SO R EC
BR− B B R−B 1 E2
E16 E20
131

Y
Y P 1
Y
A/T INDIC ATO R SW
[PAR K/N EU TR A L
4 P OS ITIO N SW ]
B
P R N D 2 L
7 8 10 9 2 3
P−B
R− W
G −R
B−O
R −B
R−L
O
6 IH2 7 IH 1 5 IH 2 4 IH2 3 IH 2 2 IH 2
G−W
R− W
B− O
R−B
R−L
O
L− W
G −W
I12
O
I12
TO BAC K− U P R− B
LIG HT
R− B
I12
D
R −L
B ,E 7
17 D 16 D 15 D
ENG INE CO N TR O L M O D ULE
L 2 R
R−L
C ,E 6
I6
A ,E 5
G −W
R− W
L−W
B−O
R−B
P− B
R− L
R− L
O
Y
E4
O D2 HI TFN 8 A 9 B 3 A 13 B 3 B 4 B 5 B 7 B 10 B 11 B
19 D 18 A 21 D
P−L
Y−L
O /D O FF
STR T
PW R
A/T P
P R N D 2 L
2nd
I9 I11
Y− L
P−L
22 ID2
TO TRAN SFER
PO SITIO N SW
R −W
P −L
N EUTR AL
P− L
7 A 8 B 12 B 1 A 6 B
C12 B , C 13 A
W −B
2 C O M BINA TIO N M ETER

Y− L A
O 4 J7
O /D P− L JU N CTIO N
M AIN C O NN EC TO R
SW A
BR
W−B
4 12
R− W R− W
W −B
IH 2
BF ID
132
AND A/T INDICATOR

SYSTEM OUTLINE
PREVIOUS AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION HAVE SELECTED EACH GEAR SHIFT USING MECHANICALLY CONTROLLED THROTTLE
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE, GOVERNOR HYDRAULIC PRESSURE AND LOCK-UP HYDRAULIC PRESSURE. THE ELECTRONICALLY
CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION, HOWEVER, ELECTRICALLY CONTROLS THE GOVERNOR PRESSURE AND LOCK-UP PRESSURE
THROUGH THE SOLENOID VALVE. THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE OF THE SOLENOID VALVE BASED ON THE INPUT SIGNALS
FROM EACH SENSOR MAKES SMOOTH DRIVING POSSIBLE BY SHIFT SELECTION FOR EACH GEAR WHICH IS MOST APPROPRIATE
TO THE DRIVING CONDITIONS AT THAT TIME.
1. GEAR SHIFT OPERATION

DURING DRIVING, THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE SELECTS THE SHIFT FOR EACH GEAR WHICH IS MOST APPROPRIATE TO THE
DRIVING CONDITIONS, BASED ON INPUT SIGNALS FROM THE ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. SENSOR TO TERMINAL THW OF THE
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE, AND ALSO THE INPUT SIGNALS TO TERMINAL SP2+ OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE FROM THE
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR DEVOTED TO THE ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION. THE CURRENT IS THEN OUTPUT TO
THE ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION SOLENOIDS. WHEN SHIFTING TO 1ST SPEED, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM
TERMINAL S1 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE TO TERMINAL 1 OF THE ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION
SOLENOID → GROUND, AND CONTINUITY TO THE NO. 1 SOLENOID CAUSES THE SHIFT. FOR 2ND SPEED, THE CURRENT FLOWS
FROM TERMINAL S1 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE TO TERMINAL 1 OF THE ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION
SOLENOIDS → GROUND AND FROM TERMINAL S2 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE TO TERMINAL 2 OF THE ELECTRONICALLY
CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION SOLENOID → GROUND, AND CONTINUITY TO NO. 1 AND NO. 2, SOLENOIDS CAUSES THE SHIFT. FOR
3RD SPEED, THERE IS NO CONTINUITY TO NO. 1 SOLENOID, ONLY TO NO. 2, CAUSING THE SHIFT. SHIFTING INTO 4TH SPEED
(OVERDRIVE) TAKES PLACE WHEN THERE IS NO CONTINUITY TO EITHER NO. 1 OR NO. 2 SOLENOID.
2. LOCK-UP OPERATION
WHEN THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE JUDGES FROM EACH SIGNAL THAT LOCK-UP OPERATION CONDITIONS HAVE BEEN MET,
THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL SL OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE TO TERMINAL 3 OF THE ELECTRONICALLY
CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION SOLENOID → GROUND, CAUSING CONTINUITY TO THE LOCK-UP SOLENOID AND CAUSING
LOCK-UP OPERATION.
3. STOP LIGHT SW CIRCUIT

IF THE BRAKE PEDAL IS DEPRESSED (STOP LIGHT SW ON) WHEN DRIVING IN LOCK-UP CONDITION, A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO
TERMINAL STP OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE, AND THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE OPERATES AND CONTINUITY TO THE
LOCK-UP SOLENOID IS CUT.
4. OVERDRIVE CIRCUIT
* O/D MAIN SW ON
WHEN THE O/D MAIN SW IS TURNED ON (SW POINT IS OPEN), A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL OD2 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL
MODULE, AND ENGINE CONTROL MODULE OPERATION CAUSES GEAR SHIFT WHEN THE CONDITIONS FOR OVERDRIVE ARE
MET.
* O/D MAIN SW OFF
WHEN THE O/D MAIN SW IS TURNED OFF (SW POINT IS CLOSED), THE CURRENT FROM THE O/D OFF INDICATOR LIGHT FLOWS
THROUGH THE O/D MAIN SW TO GROUND, CAUSING THE INDICATOR LIGHT TO LIGHT UP. AT THE SAME TIME, A SIGNAL IS INPUT
TO TERMINAL OD2 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE, AND THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE OPERATION PREVENTS SHIFT
INTO OVERDRIVE.
5. ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION PATTERN SELECT SW CIRCUIT

IF THE ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION PATTERN SELECT SW IS CHANGED FROM NORMAL TO POWER, THE
CURRENT THROUGH THE POWER INDICATOR FLOWS TO GROUND, AND FLOWS TO TERMINAL PWR OF THE ENGINE CONTROL
MODULE, THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE OPERATES, AND SHIFT UP AND SHIFT DOWN OCCUR AT HIGHER VEHICLE SPEEDS
THAN WHEN THE SW IS IN NORMAL POSITION.
6. TRANSFER SHIFT OPERATION

WHEN THE TRANSFER SHIFT LEVER IS MOVED TO L4 POSITION, A SIGNAL FROM TRANSFER L4 POSITION SW IS INPUT TO THE
TERMINAL L4 OF THE ENGINE CONTROL MODULE, THEN SHIFT TO L4 OCCURS.
133

SERVICE HINTS
E 4 (A) , E 5 (C) , E 6 (B) , E 7 (D) ENGINE CONTROL MODULE
STP -GND : 7.5- 14.0 VOLTS WITH BRAKE PEDAL IS DEPRESSED
0- 1.5 VOLTS WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL IS RELEASED
TFN -GRD : 0- 3.0 VOLTS WITH THE TRANSFER POSITION AT N POSITION
9.0- 14.0 VOLTS WITH THE TRANSFER POSITION AT EXCEPT N POSITION
OD2 -GRD : 0- 3.0 VOLTS WITH THE O/D MAIN SW TURNED ON
9.0- 14.0 VOLTS WITH THE O/D MAIN SW TURNED OFF
OD1 -GND : 9.0- 14.0 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON
SP2+ -SP2- : PULSE GENERATION WITH VEHICLE MOVING
SPD -GND : PULSE GENERATION WITH VEHICLE MOVING
IDL -GND : 0- 3.0 VOLTS WITH THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED
9.0- 14.0 VOLTS WITH THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY OPEN
VTA -GND : 3.5- 4.5 VOLTS WITH THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED
2.5- 3.5 VOLTS WITH THE THROTTLE VALVE FULLY OPEN
2 -GND : 7.5- 14.0 VOLTS WITH THE SHIFT LEVER AT 2 POSITION
0- 1.5 VOLTS WITH THE SHIFT LEVER AT EXCEPT 2 POSITION
L -GND : 7.5- 14.0 VOLTS WITH THE SHIFT LEVER AT L POSITION
0- 1.5 VOLTS WITH THE SHIFT LEVER AT EXCEPT L POSITION
R -GND : 7.5- 14.0 VOLTS WITH THE SHIFT LEVER AT R POSITION
0- 1.5 VOLTS WITH THE SHIFT LEVER AT EXCEPT R POSITION
PWR -GND : 7.5- 14.0 VOLTS WITH THE PATTERN SELECT SW AT PWR POSITION
0- 1.5 VOLTS WITH THE PATTERN SELECT SW AT NORMAL POSITION
L4 -GND : 7.5- 14.0 VOLTS WITH THE TRANSFER POSITION AT L4 POSITION
0- 1.5 VOLTS WITH THE TRANSFER POSITION AT EXCEPT L4 POSITION
E 2 ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION SOLENOID
1, 2, 3-GROUND : 11- 15 Ω
E 9 ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION PATTERN SELECT SW
3-6 : CLOSED WITH THE ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION PATTERN SELECT SW AT PWR POSITION
O 4 O/D MAIN SW
2-4 : OPEN WITH THE O/D MAIN SW AT ON POSITION
CLOSED WITH THE O/D MAIN SW AT OFF POSITION
134
AND A/T INDICATOR

: PARTS LOCATION
A3 22 E7 D 24 J7 25
C12 B 24 E9 26 O4 27
C13 A 24 F6 A 22 P1 23
C17 24 F7 B 22 S13 25
E1 22 F8 C 22 T1 23
E2 22 F11 25 T2 23
E3 22 I12 25 V2 23
E4 A 24 J1 25
E5 C 24 J4 25
E6 B 24 J6 25
: RELAY BLOCKS

EA2
EA3
EB1 30 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE AND ENGINE WIRE (NEAR THE DISTRIBUTOR)
EC1
30 ENGINE WIRE AND TRANSMISSION WIRE (NEAR THE STARTER)
EC2
ID2
ID3
IH1
IH2
: GROUND POINTS
ID 32 KEFT KICK PANEL
: SPLICE POINTS
E16 I9
E18 30 ENGINE WIRE I11 32 COWL WIRE
E20 I12
I4 I18 32 ENGINE WIRE
32 COWL WIRE
I6
135
136
AND A/T INDICATOR
137
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

FR O M PO W E R SO U RCE S YSTEM (SE E PA G E 52 )
1 1
10A G A UG E
2 0A DE FO G
F1 1
FU SE BL O C K
3 3
Y
A
L−O
J 1
JUN CTIO N
CO N NE CTO R
A
Y
Y
1 1
B 1 4
J4
JU N CTI O N
C O NNE CTO R D EFO G
B R ELA Y
3 2
1 1
L−Y
Y
17 ID 2
L− Y
2 IF1 2 BR2
11
L− O L−O L− Y
IF1
Y
2 6
IG D
2 BS1
R 5
R EAR W IN DO W
L −G
D EFO G G ER S W
E 2 BT1
3
W −B
4 IF1 1 BU1
B
W−B
1 A
R1 7 , A , R1 8 B
A
J8 RE AR W IND O W
JU N CTIO N DE FO G G ER
C O NNE C TO R
A 1 B
B
W−B
4 1 2 1
W−B W−B W−B
B R1 BS2 BT2 BX1
W−B
IE BF
138
SERVICE HINTS
DEFOG RELAY
(1) 4 - (1) 2 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION SW ON AND THE REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SW ON
R 5 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SW
2, 6-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION
: PARTS LOCATION
F11 25 J8 25 R18 B 27
J1 25 R5 25
J4 25 R17 A 27
: RELAY BLOCKS

BR1
34 LUGGAGE ROOM NO.
BR2
BS1
34 BACK DOOR NO
BS2
BT1
36 BACK DOOR NO
BT2
BU1 36 REAR WINDOW NO. 1 WIRE AND BACK DOOR NO. 2 WIRE (BACK DOOR LEFT)
BX1 36 REAR WINDOW NO. 1 WIRE AND BACK DOOR NO. 2 WIRE (BACK DOOR RIGHT)
: GROUND POINTS
F 11 J 1 J 4 J 8 BLUE
(S E E P A G E 2 0 )
A A A A A
A A A B B A A A A A A A
A A A B B B B B
(H IN T : S E E P AG E 7 )
(H IN T : S E E P A G E 7 ) (H IN T : S E E P A G E 7 )
R 5 BLACK R 17 A , R 18 B BLAC K
3 X 6
139
UNLOCK AND SEAT BELT WARNING

* 1 : W / POW ER SE AT
* 2 : W /O POW ER SEAT
FROM PO W ER SO URCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 52)
1 1
10A
10 A GAUG E
DOM E F11
FUSE B LO C K
2 3
L− Y
Y
3 EA3
L−Y
B
J3 C1 0
J UNCTION SEAT BELT W ARNING
C ONNECTOR LIGHT [CO M B. M ETER]
A J1
B
G 10 5 Y A JUNC TION
CO N NECTO R
L−Y
A
Y
S3
9 5 SEAT BELT W AR NING REALY
B IG
BUZZER
CTY BKL L− SW E
8 4 7 1
G
G
W−B
R− B
I1
G
14 ID2
R−B
I7
3 ID2
2 B c 1 (* 1)
2 B j 1 (* 2)
R− B
R− B
G
DO OR COURTESY SW
R− B
1 10 A
BUC KLE SW LH
J2
1 I1 2 JU NCTIO N
UNL OCK CON NE C TO R
W ARNING SW A
FRONT LH
[IGNITIO N
B8
SW ]
W −B
2 9
D16
FRO M DOO R LO CK
W −B
W −B
CON TROL RELAY
A I12
3 B c 1 (* 1) J7
JU NCTIO N
3 B j 1 (* 2)
W−B
W−B
CO NNECTO R
A
W−B
W−B
BF ID IE
140
SYSTEM OUTLINE
WHEN THE IGNITION SW IS TURNED TO ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM THE GAUGE FUSE, THROUGH TERMINAL 5 OF THE SEAT
BELT WARNING RELAY AND TERMINAL 5 OF THE SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT, TO TERMINAL 1 OF THE BUCKLE SW LH. IF SEAT
BELT IS NOT FASTENED AT THIS TIME (THE BUCKLE SW IS ON), THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 1 OF THE BUCKLE SW LH
TO TERMINAL 2 TO GROUND, LIGHTING UP THE SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT. SIMULTANEOUSLY, A SIGNAL FROM THE BUCKLE SW
LH IS INPUT TO TERMINAL 4 OF THE SEAT BELT WARNING RELAY, AND THE CURRENT TO TERMINAL 5 OF THE RELAY FLOWS
THROUGH TERMINAL 1 OF THE SEAT BELT WARNING RELAY TO GROUND, ACTIVATING THE SEAT BELT WARNING RELAY AND
SOUNDING SEAT BELT WARNING BUZZER FOR 4 TO 8 SECONDS. IF THE SEAT BELT IS FASTENED (THE BUCKLE SW LH IS OFF)
WHILE THE BUZZER SOUNDS, THE RELAY GROUND IS CUT, THE BUZZER STOP AND THE SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT GOES OFF.
UNLOCK WARNING SYSTEM
WHEN THE IGNITION SW IS TURNED TO OFF AND THE DRIVER’S DOOR IS OPENED (THE DOOR COURTESY SW IS ON) WHILE THE
KEY IS STILL INSERTED IN THE KEY CYLINDER (THE UNLOCK WARNING SW IS ON), A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO TERMINAL 8 OF THE
SEAT BELT WARNING RELAY, ACTIVATING THE SEAT BELT WARNING RELAY. THIS CAUSES CURRENT FROM THE DOME FUSE TO
FLOW TO TERMINAL 9 OF THE SEAT BELT WARNING RELAY → TERMINAL 1 → GROUND, SOUNDING UNLOCK WARNING BUZZER.
SERVICE HINTS
B 8 BUCKLE SW LH
1-2 : OPEN WITH THE DRIVER’S SEAT BELT IN USE
D16 DOOR COURTESY SW FRONT LH
1-GROUND : CLOSED WITH THE DRIVER’S DOOR OPEN
S 3 SEAT BELT WARNING RELAY
4-GROUND : CONTINUITY UNLESS DRIVER’S SEAT BELT IN USE
7-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE IGNITION KEY IN CYLINDER
8-GROUND : CONTINUITY WITH THE DRIVER’S DOOR OPEN
I12 UNLOCK WARNING SW [IGNITION SW]
10-9 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION KEY IN CYLINDER
: PARTS LOCATION
B8 26 I12 25 J7 25
C10 24 J1 25 S3 25
D16 26 J2 25
F11 25 J3 25
: RELAY BLOCKS

Bj1 38 FLOOR NO. 1 WIRE AND SEAT NO. 2 WIRE (UNDER THE DRIVER’S SEAT)
: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
I7 32 COWL WIRE
141
UNLOCK AND SEAT BELT WARNING
142
SRS
NOTICE: When inspecting or repairing the SRS, perform the operation in accordance with the following
precautionary instructions and the procedure and precautions in the Repair Manual for the applicable model
year.
Malfunction symptoms of the supplemental restraint system are difficult to confirm, so the diagnostic trouble
codes become the most important source of information when troubleshooting.
When troubleshooting the supplemental restraint system, always inspect the diagnostic trouble codes before
disconnecting the battery.
Work must be started after 90 seconds from the time the Ignition SW is set to the “LOCK” position and the
negative (-) terminal cable is disconnected from the battery.
(The supplemental restraint system is equipped with a back-up power source so that if work is started within
90 seconds of disconnecting the negative (-) terminal cable of the battery, the SRS may be activated).
When the negative (-) terminal cable is disconnected from the battery, memory of the clock and audio systems
will be cancelled. So before starting work, make a record of the contents memorized by each memory system.
When work is finished, reset the clock and audio system as before and adjust the clock.
To avoid erasing the memory of each memory system, never use a back-up power supply from outside the
vehicle.
When removing the steering wheel pad or handling a new steering wheel pad, keep the pad upper surface
facing upward. Also, lock the lock lever of the twin lock type connector at the rear of the pad and take care
not to damage the connector.
(Storing the pad with its metallic surface up may lead to a serious accident if the SRS inflates for some reason.)
Always store a removed or new front passenger airbag assembly with the airbag door facing up. Storing the
airbag assembly with the airbag door facing down could cause a serious accident if the airbag inflates.
Store the steering wheel pad where the ambient temperature remains below 93°C (200°F), without high
humidity and away from electrical noise.
Never use SRS parts from another vehicle. When replacing SRS parts, replace them with new parts.
Never disassemble and repair the steering wheel pad, front passenger airbag assembly airbag sensor
assembly or front airbag sensors.
Before repairing the body, remove the airbag sensors if during repair shocks are likely to be applied to the
sensors due to vibration of the body or direct tapping with tools or other parts.
Do not reuse a steering wheel pad or front airbag sensors.
After evaluating whether the airbag sensor assembly is damaged or not, decide whether or not to reuse it.
(See the Repair Manual for the method for evaluating the airbag sensor assembly.)
When troubleshooting the supplemental restraint system, use a high-impedance (Min. 10KΩ/V) tester.
The wire harness of the supplemental restraint system is integrated with the cowl wire harness assembly. The
vehicle wiring harness exclusively for the airbag system is distinguished by corrugated yellow tubing, as are
the connectors.
Do not measure the resistance of the airbag squibs.
(It is possible this will deploy the airbag and is very dangerous.)
If the wire harness used in the supplemental restraint system is damaged, replace the whole wire harness
assembly.
When the connector to the front airbag sensors can be replaced alone (when there is no damage to the wire
harness), use the repair wire specially designed for the purpose.
(Refer to the Repair Manual for the applicable Model year for details of the replacement method.)
INFORMATION LABELS (NOTICES) are attached to the periphery of the SRS components. Follow the
instructions on the notices.
143
SRS
The supplemental restraint system has connectors which possess the functions described below:
1. SRS ACTIVATION PREVENTION MECHANISM
Each connector contains a short spring plate. When the
connector is disconnected, the short spring plate
automatically connects the power source and grounding
terminals of the squib to preclude a potential difference
between the terminals.
2. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION CHECK MECHANISM

This mechanism is designed to electrically check if
connectors are connected properly and completely.
The electrical connection check mechanism is designed so
that the connection detection pin connects with the
diagnosis terminals when the connector housing lock is in
the locked condition.
144
3. CONNECTOR TWIN-LOCK MECHANISM

With this mechanism connectors (male and female
connectors) are locked by two locking devices to increase
connection reliability. If the primary lock is incomplete, ribs
interfere and prevent the secondary lock.
145
SRS
FROM P OW ER SO UR C E S YS TEM (SEE P AG E 52 )
1 1 1
1 0A EC U − B
7. 5A IG N
15 A C IG
F 11
F USE
BLO C K
2 2 2
B−R
GR
C1 0
A SR S W AR NING LIG H T
[C O M B. M E TE R]
J3
B− L
JUN CTIO N
CO NN EC TO R 3
A
W−L
I6
GR
W−L
SH OR T C ON N ECTO R (SRS )
SH OR T C ON N ECTO R (SRS )
3 B 4 B 1 B 2 B
B
B
A ,S 5
A ,S 7
W−L
3 A 4 A 1 A 2 A
B− Y
S 4
S 6
W−L
B −W
B− L
GR
9 10 8 7
IG 2 A CC LA TC
11 IH1 12 IH 1
A 17
A IRB AG SE NSO R ASSEM B LY
E1 P+ P− D+ D− E2
5 2 1 4 3 6
W−L
B− Y
W−R
B− R
D ATA LIN K CO N NEC TO R 1
1 2 11 5
TC AB
SP IR AL
CAB L E
1 2
D 1
BR
BR
A1 8 A1 9
AIR BAG SQ UIB AIRB AG SQ UIB
(FR O NT PASS ENG E R’ S (S TE E RIN G
A IRBA G AS SE M BL Y) W HE EL P AD)
BR
2 A 1 A S 4 A ,S5 B
SHO R T
CO NN EC TO R (SRS )
2 B 1 B
BR
BR
W−B
I12
W−B
ID IE
146
SYSTEM OUTLINE
THE SRS IS A DRIVER AND PASSENGER PROTECTION DEVICE WHICH HAS A SUPPLEMENTAL ROLE TO THE SEAT BELTS.
WHEN THE IGNITION SW IS TURNED TO ACC OR ON. THE CURRENT FROM THE CIG FUSE FLOWS TO TERMINAL 10 OF THE AIRBAG
SENSOR ASSEMBLY. ONLY WHEN THE IGNITION SW IS ON DOES THE CURRENT FROM THE IGN FUSE FLOWS TO TERMINAL 9 OF
THE ASSEMBLY.
IF AN ACCIDENT OCCURS WHILE DRIVING, DECELERATION CAUSED BY A FRONTAL IMPACT IS DETECTED BY THE SENSOR IN THE
AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY, AND WHEN THE FRONTAL IMPACT EXCEEDS A SET LEVEL (WHEN THE SAFING SENSOR BUILT INTO
THE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY IS ON, THE FLOOR SENSOR BUILT INTO THE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY IS ON AND THE AIRBAG
SENSOR ASSEMBLY IS ON), THE CURRENT FROM THE CIG OR THE IGN FUSE FLOWS THROUGH THE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY
TO TERMINALS 4 AND 2 OF THE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY TO TERMINAL 1 OF THE AIRBAG SQUIB → TERMINAL 2 → TERMINALS
3 AND 1 OF THE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY → THE FLOOR SENSOR BUILT INTO THE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY → TERMINAL 5,
TERMINAL 6 OR BODY GROUND → GROUND.
WHEN THE SAFING SENSOR BUILT INTO THE AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY IS ON, AND FLOOR SENSOR BUILT INTO THE AIRBAG
SENSOR ASSEMBLY IS ON, ONE OF THE ABOVE-MENTIONED CIRCUITS IS ACTIVATED SO THAT THE CURRENT FLOWS TO THE
AIRBAG SQUIBS, CAUSING IT TO OPERATE.
THE AIRBAG STORED INSIDE THE STEERING WHEEL PAD IS INSTANTANEOUSLY EXPANDED TO SOFTEN THE SHOCK TO A DRIVER.
SIMULTANEOUSLY, THE AIRBAG STORED INSIDE THE PASSENGER’S INSTRUMENT PANEL IS INSTANTANEOUSLY EXPANDED TO
SOFTEN THE SHOCK TO A PASSENGER.
: PARTS LOCATION
A17 24 D1 22 S5 B 25
A18 24 F11 25 S6 A 25
A19 24 J3 25 S7 B 25
C10 24 S4 A 25

: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
I6 32 COWL WIRE
147
SRS
148
MEMO
149
CENTER DIFFERENTIAL LOCK

FRO M PO W ER SO UR CE SY STE M (SE E PAG E 5 2 )
* 1 : C EN TE R DIFF. L OC K
* 2 : A /T P
1 1
10A G AU G E
30 A DIFF F11
FUS E B L O CK
3 2
L−B
Y B B Y
J4
Y
B JU N CTIO N
CO NN ECTO R 2 IF1
Y
6 IH1
A
[P A RK/N EU TRAL PO SITIO N SW ]
J1
(CE N TER D IFF. LO C K)

JU N CTIO N Y 7
CO N NECTO R E18
A
4
Y
A /T INDIC ATO R S W
SH O RT PIN
3 EC 1
10
S1 0
Y
L− B
7
Y
B
2
P 1
R−L
T2
6 IH 2 9 IF1
TRAN SFER L 4
PO SIT IO N SW
R− L
C 1 0 ,AC 11 B , C 13 C
1
5 A C O M BIN ATIO N M ETE R 8 C
B
B −L
(* 1 ) (* 2)
4 EC 1
9 3
24
2 B 7 C B− L B−L B− L 7
IH1 I11
Y− L
P− B
Y−L
I11
P −B
I6
Y−L
C EN TER D IFF. L OC K
P− B
( N EUT R AL DE TEC TIO N )
B− L
C O NTR O L RE L AY
1
21 9
FRO M A BS EC U
3 IH1 TFN L4
Y− B
2
D IO D E
D 28
C 5
1 E C1 E 7
EN G INE C O NTR O L M O D UL E 2
Y− G
Y− B
16 2
Y−G Y− G
2 IH 2 EC 1
W−B
4 10 1 5
2
G−R
G−B
G−Y
C 2
G
CE NTER D IFF. L O CK T 3 A
INDIC AT O R SW TR ANS FER
C O NNEC TO R
N EU TR AL
JU N C TIO N
1 PO S ITI O N SW 10 IH1 16 IH 1 8 IH1 9 IH 1

1 A
G−R
G−B
G−Y
W−B
J2
W −B
W −B W−B 8 EC1 1 2 EC 1 7 EC1 1 1 E C1

E2 2
W −B
G−R
G−B
G−Y
I12
G
2 5 3 6
1 0 EC 1
W−B
W−B
W −B
4
M
EC C 1 IE ID
CE NTER D IFF.
L O CK C O NTR O L
M O TO R
150
SERVICE HINTS
C5 CENTER DIFF. LOCK CONTROL RELAY
7-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION AND FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE CONTROL LEVER AT
L4 POSITION
: PARTS LOCATION
C1 22 D28 24 P1 23
C2 22 E7 24 S10 25
C5 24 F11 25 T2 23
C10 A 24 J1 25 T3 23
C11 B 24 J2 25
C13 C 24 J4 25

EC1 30 ENGINE WIRE AND TRANSMISSION WIRE (NEAR THE STARTER)
IH1
IH2
: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
E18 30 ENGINE WIRE I11
32 COWL WIRE
E22 30 TRANSMISSION WIRE I12
I6 32 COWL WIRE
C 1 C 2 G R AY C 5 C10 A G R AY
X 2 3 1 2 3 4
5
4 5 6 1 2 5 X 7 X 9 10
C11 B B LU E C1 3 C E 7 D AR K G R AY
2 X X 7 8 X 9
21
F11 J1 J2 B LU E J4
A A A A A
(S EE P AG E 2 0 ) A A A A A A A A A A B B
A A A B B B B B
(HIN T : SE E PA G E 7)
(H INT : SE E PA G E 7) (H IN T : S E E PAG E 7 )
P 1 G RA Y S1 0 T2 G R AY T3 G R AY
X X X X
X 4 X X 7 X X 10 1 2
7 1 2
151
FRONT/REAR DIFFERENTIAL LOCK

FR O M PO W E R SO U RC E SYSTEM (SEE P AG E 5 2)
3 0 A D IFF
F11
FU S E BL O CK
2
L− B
FR ON T/R EAR
D 4
REA R
L −B
I2 D IFF. LO CK
C O NTR OL SW
L−B
1 2
B− G
R−B
8 12 6
R RF
D 5
D IFF. L O CK EC U
GND M4 M3 REL 4 REL 3
13 5 7 14 16
L−R
L −B
L −Y
L
2 B b1 1 B b1 4 B b1 3 B b1
W −B
L− G
L−B
L−Y
L
2 3 5 6
F1 2 4
FRO NT DIF F . L O C K
W−B
C ONTR O L M O TO R
W −B
B1
W−B
6 B b1
W−B
A
W−B A J8
JU N CTIO N
CO N N ECTO R
A
W−B
W−B
IE
152
FRO M PO W ER SO UR C E SYSTEM (SEE PAG E 5 2)
10A GAUGE
F11
FUSE BLOCK
Y
A
L−W J1
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
A
C10 A C11 B C13 C
Y
3 C 5 A COMBINATION METER
REAR DIFF.
CENTER
FRONT
LOCK
LOCK
DIFF.
DIFF.
LOCK
4
1 C 10 C 9 C 2 B
BR
P−B
G−R
W
1 3 11 10 2 9 15
P−B
G−O
G−B
G−Y
I6
G
G−R
I14
10 ID1 3 ID1 14 ID1 9 ID1
W
I5
G−O
G−B
G−Y
G
P−B
G−R
1 BQ1 2 BQ1 5 BQ1 6 BQ1
13 ID1
G−B
G−L
G−Y
G
2 Bh2 1 Bh2 4
W
Bh2 3 Bh2
12 BQ1 3 IH1
G−B
G−L
G−Y
G
2 3 5 6
Y−B
Y−W
5 Bh2 5 Bb1 1 EC1

M
Y−W
G−R
Y−B
4
R10
CENTER DIFF. LOCK
FRONT DIFF. LOCK
REAR DIFF. LOCK

REAR DIFF. LOCK
CONTROL MOTOR 2 2 2
INDICATOR SW
POSITION SW
POSITION SW
W−B
F13
R11
C2
1 1 1
W−B
B25
CENTER DIFF. LOCK
W−B
W−B
W−B
6 Bh2
W−B 10 EC1
W−B
W−B
BR
BG ID EC
153
FRONT/REAR DIFFERENTIAL LOCK

SYSTEM OUTLINE
THIS SYSTEM FREES OR LOCKS THE FRONT AND REAR DIFFERENTIALS ACCORDING TO THE POSITION OF THE DIFF. LOCK
CONTROL SW. THE DIFFERENTIAL WILL LOCK ONLY WHEN THE CENTER DIFF. LOCK INDICATOR SW IS ON AND THE VEHICLE
SPEED IS AT 8 KM/H (5 MPH) OR LESS.
WHEN THE CENTER DIFF. LOCK INDICATOR SW IS OFF, DIFFERENTIAL LOCK DOES NOT OCCUR EVEN IF THE DIFF. LOCK CONTROL
SW IS IN RR POSITION OR FRRR POSITION.
WHEN THE DIFF. LOCK CONTROL SW IS SWITCHED FROM OFF POSITION TO RR POSITION, THE CURRENT FLOW TO TERMINAL 12
OF THE DIFF. LOCK ECU. IF THE LIMIT SW ON THE LOCK SIDE INSIDE THE REAR DIFF. LOCK CONTROL MOTOR IS ON AT THIS TIME,
UNTIL THE LIMIT SW IS TURNED OFF, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM THE DIFF FUSE TO TERMINAL 8 OF THE DIFF. LOCK ECU →
TERMINAL 3 → TERMINAL 3 OF THE REAR DIFF. LOCK CONTROL MOTOR → TERMINAL 2 → TERMINAL 1 OF THE DIFF. LOCK ECU →
TERMINAL 13 → GROUND. THIS DRIVES THE REAR DIFF. LOCK CONTROL MOTOR AND LOCKS THE REAR DIFFERENTIAL. WHEN
THE REAR DIFFERENTIAL LOCKS, THE REAR DIFF. LOCK POSITION SW TURNS ON, LIGHTING UP THE REAR DIFF. LOCK INDICATOR
LIGHT IN THE COMBINATION METER.
WHEN THE DIFF. LOCK CONTROL SW IS SWITCHED FROM RR POSITION TO FRRR POSITION, THE CURRENT FLOWS TO TERMINAL
6 OF THE DIFF. LOCK ECU. IF THE LIMIT SW ON THE LOCK SIDE INSIDE THE FRONT DIFF. LOCK CONTROL MOTOR IS ON AT THIS
TIME, UNTIL THE LIMIT SW IS TURNED OFF, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM THE DIFF FUSE TO TERMINAL 8 OF THE DIFF. LOCK ECU
→ TERMINAL 7 → TERMINAL 3 OF THE FRONT DIFF. LOCK CONTROL MOTOR → TERMINAL 2 → TERMINAL 5 OF THE DIFF. LOCK
ECU → TERMINAL 13 → GROUND. THIS DRIVES THE FRONT DIFF. LOCK CONTROL MOTOR AND LOCKS THE FRONT DIFFERENTIAL.
WHEN THE FRONT DIFFERENTIAL LOCKS, THE FRONT DIFF. LOCK POSITION SW TURNS ON, LIGHTING UP THE FRONT DIFF. LOCK
INDICATOR LIGHT IN THE COMBINATION METER.
WHEN THE DIFF. LOCK CONTROL SW IS SWITCHED FROM FRRR POSITION TO RR POSITION, THE CURRENT TO TERMINAL 6 OF
THE DIFF. LOCK ECU IS CUT OFF. IF THE LIMIT SW ON THE FREE SIDE INSIDE THE FRONT DIFF. LOCK CONTROL MOTOR IS ON AT
THIS TIME, UNTIL THE LIMIT SW IS TURNED OFF, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM THE DIFF FUSE TO TERMINAL 8 OF THE DIFF. LOCK
ECU → TERMINAL 5 → TERMINAL 2 OF THE FRONT DIFF. LOCK CONTROL MOTOR → TERMINAL 3 → TERMINAL 7 OF THE DIFF.
LOCK ECU → TERMINAL 13 → GROUND. THIS DRIVES THE FRONT DIFF. LOCK CONTROL MOTOR AND FREE THE FRONT
DIFFERENTIAL. THIS CAUSES THE FRONT DIFF. LOCK POSITION SW AND THE FRONT DIFF. LOCK INDICATOR LIGHT INSIDE THE
COMBINATION METER TO TURN OFF.
WHEN THE DIFF. LOCK CONTROL SW IS SWITCHED FROM RR POSITION TO OFF POSITION, CURRENT TO TERMINAL 12 OF THE
DIFF. LOCK ECU IS CUT OFF. IF THE LIMIT SW ON THE FREE SIDE INSIDE THE REAR DIFF. LOCK CONTROL MOTOR IS ON, UNTIL THE
LIMIT SW IS TURNED OFF, THE CURRENT FLOW FROM THE DIFF FUSE TO TERMINAL 8 OF THE DIFF. LOCK ECU → TERMINAL 1 →
TERMINAL 2 OF THE REAR DIFF. LOCK CONTROL MOTOR → TERMINAL 3 → TERMINAL 3 OF THE DIFF. LOCK ECU → TERMINAL 13
→ GROUND. THIS DRIVES THE REAR DIFF. LOCK CONTROL MOTOR AND FREES THE REAR DIFFERENTIAL. WHEN THE REAR
DIFFERENTIAL IS FREE, THE REAR DIFF. LOCK POSITION SW AND THE REAR DIFF. LOCK INDICATOR LIGHT IN THE COMBINATION
METER ARE TURNED OFF.
THE DIFF. LOCK INDICATOR LIGHT FLASHES WHEN:
∗ THE DIFF. LOCK CONTROL SW IS SWITCHED TO RR POSITION OR FRRR POSITION DURING DIFFERENTIAL LOCK PROHIBITION
CONDITIONS (VEHICLE SPEED ABOVE 8 KM/H (5 MPH) OR CENTER DIFF. LOCK INDICATOR SW OFF).
∗ THE DIFF. LOCK POSITION SW IS TURNED OFF DURING OPERATION OF THE DIFF. LOCK CONTROL MOTOR.
SERVICE HINTS
D 4 DIFF. LOCK CONTROL SW
4-1 : CLOSED WITH THE DIFF. LOCK CONTROL SW AT “RR” POSITION OR “FRRR” POSITION
4-2 : CLOSED WITH THE DIFF. LOCK SW AT “FRRR” POSITION
D 5 DIFF. LOCK ECU
(DISCONNECTED WIRING CONNECTOR FROM ECU)
4-GROUND : PULSE GENERATION WITH VEHICLE MOVING
8-GROUND : 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW ON
2-GROUND : ABOUT 0 VOLTS WITH THE REAR DIFF. LOCK INDICATOR LIGHT ON
: 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE REAR DIFF. LOCK INDICATOR LIGHT OFF
9-GROUND : ABOUT 0 VOLTS WITH THE FRONT DIFF. LOCK INDICATOR LIGHT ON
: 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE FRONT DIFF. LOCK INDICATOR LIGHT OFF
15-GROUND : ABOUT 0 VOLTS WITH THE CENTER DIFF. LOCK INDICATOR LIGHT ON
: 9-14 VOLTS WITH THE CENTER DIFF. LOCK INDICATOR LIGHT OFF
F12, R10 FRONT, REAR DIFF. LOCK CONTROL MOTOR
2-3 : 0.3-100
154
: PARTS LOCATION
C2 22 D5 24 J8 25
C10 A 24 F11 25 R10 27
C11 B 24 F12 26 R11 27
C13 C 24 F13 26
D4 24 J1 25

Bb1 36 COWL WIRE AND FRAME WIRE (RIGHT FENDER)
: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
I2 I14 32 COWL WIRE
I5 32 COWL WIRE B1 36 FRAME WIRE
I6 B25 36 FLAME NO. 2 WIRE
155
RADIO AND PLAYER

FRO M PO W E R SO U RC E SY STEM (S EE PAG E 5 2)
1 1
1 0A G AUG E
15 A C IG
F11
FUSE BL O C K
3 2
GR
Y
R 1 A R3 B
RA DIO AND PLAY ER
C O NNE CTO R
B A
JU NC TIO N
A GR 3
A ACC
(* 2)
J4
AM P R L− RL+ RR − RR +
B
9 A 6 B 2 B 3 B 1 B
J UN CTION C O NN EC TO R
R−B
(* 2)
(* 2)
Y
(* 2)
(* 2)
(* 2)
W
R
B
R−B R−B
I14
(* 1) (* 1)
R− B
A GR GR
J 3
(* 1) (* 1)
A
R−B R−B
I1 4
(* 1) (* 1)
Y
Y Y
I9 I9
(* 3 )
GR
(* 1)
B B B
(* 3 )
(* 3 )
R−B
I9 I9
Y
(* 3 ) (* 1)
16 II1 15 II1 8 II2 14 II1 W

I15
(* 1)
(R ADIO AND P LA YER)
B
R− B
(* 3)
(* 3)
(* 3)
(* 3)
GR
R
Y
4 I1 5
(* 1)
CO O L ING FAN
W
9 3 6 2
M
19 ID 1 20 ID 1
R
+B AM P+ R L− RL +
W 6
1 W O OFER AM PL IFIER
C1 6
17 II1 18 II1
GND W F− W F+ R R+ RR−
Y
7 10 4 1 5
W
W
R
B2 2
(* 3)
R
B2 2
(* 3)
W
LG − R
L G −B
W−B
W−B
(* 3 )
(* 3 )
(* 3 )
Y W
B1 4 B2 2
R
(* 3) (* 3 )
B R
B1 4 B2 2
3 BM 1 (* 3) (* 3 )
W
R
CO NNECTO R
B
JUN C TIO N
A
6 BR 1 7 BR1 5 BN 1 6 BN 1 1 BW 1 2 BW1 5 BP 1 6 BP 1
J7
(* 3 )
(* 3 )
( * 3)
(* 3 )
A
W
W
R
R
Y
B
W −B
(* 3 )
W−B
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
W 5 R 23 R 12 R 24 R1 3
W O O FER (S PEAK ER ) R O OF SP EAKER R EA R D O OR R O OF S PEA KER REAR DO O R
LH S PEAKER LH RH SP EAKER R H
ID BF
156
*1 : SEPARATE TYPE AMPLIFIER

*2 : BUILT−IN TYPE AMPLIFIER
*3 : 9 SPEAKER (W/ CD)
FROM POW ER SOUR CE SYSTEM (SEE PAG E 52)
10A
DOM E
L−Y
3 EA1
R1 A R3 B
L−Y
RADIO AND PLAYER
B
B J3
FL− FL + FR− FR+ GND +B JUN CTION
CO NNECTO R
6 A 2 A 5 A 1 A 7 A 4 A
(* 2 )
L−Y
B
R2
(* 1)
L−Y
RAD IO AND
(* 2)
(* 2)
(* 2)
(* 2)
(* 2)
BR
LG
V
PLAYER
R−B R−B 1
AM P +
(* 1) (* 1)
10 A
3 B−L 3
1 +B ACC B ACC
GR GR (* 1 )
A ACC
(* 1) (* 1) 4 LG − R 4
R−B R−B 1 +B B +B
B AM P+ (* 1 )
(* 1) (* 1) (SHIELD ED)
Y Y 12 5 B 5
A RL− M UTE B M UT E
(* 1) (* 1) (* 1 )
B B 5 6 G 6
A RL+ FL+ B FL +
(* 1) (* 1) (* 1 )
W W 11 7 L 7
A RR− FR+ B FR +
(* 1) (* 1) (* 1 )
R R 4 12 R 12
A RR+ S GND B S G ND
(* 1) (* 1) (* 1 )
V 8 13 W 13
I10 A FL − BEEP B BE EP
(* 1) (* 1 )
P 3 14 Y 14
I10 A FL + RL+ B RL +
(* 1) (* 1 )
L 7 15 BR 15
I1 4 A FR− RR+ B RR +
(* 1) (* 1 )
LG 2 (SHIELDED)
I14 A FR+ I14 I10
(* 3)
(* 3)
V
(* 1)
STEREO COM PONE NT
W −B
W −B
(* 3)
(* 3)
LG
L
11 11
S11 A , S 12 B
GND B G ND
AMPLIFIER
8 BJ1 7 BJ1 8 B K1 7 BK1
GND
9 A
(* 3)
(* 3)
(* 3)
(* 3)
(* 2)
BR
LG
LG
LG
V
P
L
(* 1)
BR
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
F14 F9 F15 F10
FRONT DOOR FRONT FRONT DOOR FRO NT
SPEAKER LH SPEAKER L H SPEAKER RH SPEA KER RH
IE
157
RADIO AND PLAYER

SERVICE HINTS
R 1 (A) RADIO AND PLAYER
(A) 4-GROUND : ALWAYS APPROX. 12 VOLTS
(A) 3-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ACC OR ON POSITION
(A) 7-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY
S11 (A) STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER
(A) 1-GROUND : APPOX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ACC OR ON POSITION
(A) 10-GROUND : ALWAYS APPROX. 12 VOLTS
(A) 9-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY
: PARTS LOCATION
C16 24 J4 25 R23 27
F9 25 J7 25 R24 27
F10 25 R1 A 25 S11 A 25
F11 25 R2 25 S12 B 25
F14 26 R3 B 25 W5 27
F15 26 R12 27 W6 27
J3 25 R13 27
: RELAY BLOCKS

II1
II2
BW1 36 ROOF NO. 2 WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE (RIGHT QUARTER PANEL INNER)
: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
I9 I15 32 COWL WIRE
I10 32 COWL WIRE B14 36 FLOOR WIRE
158
159
REAR HEATER
FR O M PO W ER SO UR CE SYSTEM (SE E PAG E 52 )
1 1
2 0A R EAR − HTR
10A G A UG E
F11
FUS E BLO CK
2 3
L−W
Y
B
2 J4
II2 JU N C TIO N
C O N N E CTO R
B
L− W
Y
R4
R EAR H EATER SW 5
B21
L0
L0
HI
HI
L −W
L −W
6 4
4 2 1
R1 5 3
RE AR HEA TE R
RE L AY
W−B
L− B
L− Y
2 1
1 II2 5 II2
W−B
W−B
L− B
L− Y
L
3 2
1
M
R14
R EAR HEA TE R
3 BM1
A
J7
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
A
W −B
W−B
BF ID
160
SERVICE HINTS
R 4 REAR HEATER SW
2-1 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON AND REAR HEATER SW AT LO POSITION
4-1 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON AND REAR HEATER SW AT HI POSITION
R15 REAR HEATER RELAY
4-1 : CLOSED WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION
: PARTS LOCATION
F11 25 J7 25 R14 27
J4 25 R4 25 R15 27

: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
F1 1 J 4 J 7 B L UE R 4 BLACK R14
(S E E P A G E 2 0 ) A A A A A 1 2
4 5 1
B B A A A A A A A
B B B B B 2 3
(HIN T : S E E P A G E 7 )
(H IN T : S E E P A G E 7 )
R15
1 2 3
4 X 6
161
COMBINATION METER
FR OM POW ER SOURCE SY STEM (SEE PAGE 52)
FROM ENGINE CONTROL MODULE

10A GAUGE
F11
FUSE B LOCK
FROM DIFF. LOCK ECU

FROM PARK/NEUTRAL
3
POSITION SW
Y
Y
JUNCTION CONNEC TOR
B A
A Y Y
B A J1
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
L− W
B−R
J4
C10 A ,C11 B ,C12 D , C13 C

5 A COMBINATION M ETER 5 B 3 C
TACHO
LEVEL
VOLT
FUEL
FUEL
SPEEDOM ETER
OIL
Y
OIL
BULB CHECK
RELAY
DEL AY
11 C 14 C 3 B 6 A 1 C 11 B 4 C
BR
R− O
(SHIELDED)
Y−R
R
BR
I6 I6
1 IH1
6 IH1 5 ID2 1 8 ID2 7 IH2
BR
R− O
3 EA4 1 EA4
Y −R
6 EC1
R
Y
BR
B
BR
3 EC1 2 BO1 1 BO 1
P
R−G
E10
(SHIELDED)
Y−R
W
OIL LEVEL W ARNIN G SW
R
Y
2 Ea 1
1 4 1 E11
R− G
BR
3
1 EY1 3 EY1
W
BR
O1
V1
PRESSURE SENDER)
2 E12 VEH ICLE SPEED SENSOR

NOISE FILTER (OIL
1
B
F1 8 5 1 A (CO MBINATION METER)

OIL PRESSURE
FUEL SENDER
,O3
BR
[FUEL PUM P]
(SHIELDED)
SENDER
A
4 BO 1 2 1 2
BR
O2
N2
1 B
BR
Y
BR B
E13
1
Y
Ea 1
3 Ea 1
9
BR BR
EC1
W −B
BR
BR
BF EC
162
B
Y
BR
CHAR G E
7 . 5A IG N
2
1
Y− L Y− L B− L
7 B
13 C
TO G E NE RATO R
4 EA3
E7
E NG INE C O NTR O L
M O DU LE A/T O IL
F1 1
TEM P.
10
5
Y− L
7 A
O ILW
TACO
FUS E BL O CK
B 1
BR AKE FL U ID
L E VEL W AR NIN G S W BR AKE
A
A
2
1
W−B W −B R− B R−B
8 A
ID
I6
P 4
J2
PA RKIN G BRA K E
FR O M PO W ER SO U R CE SY STEM (S EE PAG E 52)
R−B
9
SW
1
R−W
JU N CT IO N
BR
ID2
W−B
CO N N E CTO R
W ATER
TEM P.
BR
1 A
W 3 C10 ,A
W ATER TEM P.
2
SE NDE R
1
G G−R
10 B
IH 1
,C11 B
CEN TER
COM BINATION METER
Y
3
DIFF. L O CK
Y− B Y− B P− B
,C12 D
TO SEN TER D IFF.
2 B
IH 1
1 EC 1
L O CK IN DICA TO R S W
M AL FUNC TIO N
, C13 C
IN DICA TO R L A MP

TO EN G IN E C O NTRO L Y− R
6 B
M OD UL E
C RU IS E
G−Y
TO C RU ISE CO N TR O L EC U 9 A
A BS
O
4 A
TO AB S ECU
SEAT BEL T
TO SEAT BELT G
10 A
W A RN IN G R ELA Y
TU RN L H
J7
G −B
8 B
JU N CT IO N
FR O M H AZA RD S W
C ON NE CTO R
TUR N R H AND TU RN SIG N AL SW

[CO M B. SW ]
A
A
W−B W−B G −Y
1 B
9 B
Y
163
COMBINATION METER
FRO M P O W ER S O U RC E SY S TEM (SEE PA G E 5 2)
1 1 1 1
10 A 1 5A
1 0A EC U− B
DO M E HE AD
F11
1 5A T AIL
(RH )
FU SE
BL O CK
3 2
2 2 2 2
G
R −W
L −Y
B
B G
3 E A1 5 EA 2
J 1
B J UN C TIO N
L−Y
CO N NEC TO R
B− R
Y
B
J3 R− L
R −W
J U N CTIO N
G
C O N N EC TO R
B C 10 A , C11 B
Y
L− Y
C 12 D , C13 C
9 D 16 C C O M B IN ATIO N M E TE R 6 C 2 A 2 C 8 C
D IFF. LO C K
D IFF. LO C K
ILL U M INA TIO N

H IG H BEA M
O /D OFF
DO O R
STRT
A /T P
S RS
2˙
FR O N T
R EAR
8 D 12 D 15 C 9 C 10 C 5 C 3 A M E TER 12 B 7 C
Y− L
(N EU TR A L DE TECTIO N)
1
R− W
R− W
W−L
G−R
R−Y
P−L
2
Y− L
D IO DE
TO ENG IN E CO N TRO L
TO FR ON T D IFF. LO C K
TO RE AR D IFF. LO C K
TO O/D M A IN
TO AIR B AG SEN SO R
T O L IG HT C ON TRO L S W
TO D OO R C O U R TE SY SW
D28
16 IH 2
PO S ITIO N S W
ASS EM BL Y
P O SITIO N SW
SW
W−G
[C O M B. SW ]
Y−G
M O D U LE
2 E C1
Y− G
TO TR AN SFE R
N EU TR AL
P O SITIO N SW
A
J 5 A W−G
JUN C T IO N
CO N NE C TO R
A
W −G
R 7
R H EO S TA T
3 2 W−B
L E
164
FR O M A/T IN D IC A TO R S W
FR O M E L E C TR O N IC A L LY
PA TT ER N S E L E C T S W
TR A N SM ISS IO N
R−W
G −R
B− O
R −B
R−L
C O N TR O L L E D
O
G 6 IH 2 7 IH 1 5 IH 2 4 IH 2 3 IH 2 2 IH 2
R −L
R−W
G −W
B− O
R−B
R−L R− L
G
I6
P− B
R −L
13 D 3 D 4 D 5 D 7 D 10 D 11 D 2 D
A /T IN D IC A TO R
IL L U M IN A TIO N
PW R
D
P
L
6 D 1 D
C10 A , C11 B , C12 D , C1 3 C
C O M BIN A TIO N M E TER
W −G
W−B
J 7
JU NC TIO N
C O N N E C TO R
A A W −B
W −G
W −B A A W −B W −B
I12
J 2
W −B
J U N C TIO N
C O N N E C TO R
IE ID
165
COMBINATION METER
SERVICE HINTS
B 1 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING SW
1-2 : CLOSED WITH THE FLOAT DOWN
C10 (A) , C11 (B) , C12 (D) , C13 (C) COMBINATION METER
(C) 16-GROUND : ALWAYS APPROX. 12 VOLTS
(A) 5, (C) 13-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION
(A) 1, (B) 1, (C) 1, (D) 6-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY
P 4 PARKING BRAKE SW
1-GROUND : CLOSED WITH THE PARKING BRAKE LEVER PULLED UP
: PARTS LOCATION
B1 22 F18 26 O1 23
C10 A 24 J1 25 O2 A 23
C11 B 24 J2 25 O3 B 23
C12 D 24 J3 25 P4 27
C13 C 24 J4 25 R7 25
D28 24 J5 25 V1 23
E7 24 J7 25 W3 23
F11 25 N 2 23
: RELAY BLOCKS

EA1
EA3
EY1 30 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH WIRE AND ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE (NEAR THE AIR CLEANER)
Ea1 30 TRANSMISSION WIRE AND SPEED SENSOR WIRE (NEAR THE TRANSMISSION)
IH1
IH2
: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
E10 E13 30 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH WIRE
30 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE
E11 I6 32 COWL WIRE
E12 30 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH WIRE
166
167
AIR CONDITIONING
SYSTEM OUTLINE
1. HEATER BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION
THE CURRENT FLOWS CONSTANTLY FROM THE FL HEATER FUSE TO TERMINAL 5 OF THE HEATER RELAY. WHEN THE IGNITION
SW IS TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS THROUGH GAUGE FUSE TO TERMINAL 5 OF THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RELAY,
AND TO TERMINAL 3 OF THE HEATER RELAY → TERMINAL 1 → TERMINAL (A) 1 OF THE HEATER CONTROL SW.
* LOW SPEED OPERATION
WHEN THE BLOWER SW (HEATER CONTROL SW) IS SET TO LO POSITION, THE CURRENT TO TERMINAL (A) 1 OF THE HEATER
CONTROL SW FLOWS TO TERMINAL (B) 16 → GROUND, ACTIVATING THE HEATER RELAY ON. AS A RESULT, THE CURRENT TO
TERMINAL 5 OF THE HEATER RELAY FLOWS TO TERMINAL 4 → TERMINAL 1 OF THE BLOWER MOTORS → TERMINAL 2 →
TERMINAL 1 OF THE BLOWER RESISTOR → TERMINAL 4 → GROUND, CAUSING THE BLOWER MOTORS TO OPERATE AT LOW
SPEED.
* HIGH SPEED OPERATION
WHEN THE BLOWER SW (HEATER CONTROL SW) IS SET TO HI POSITION, THE CURRENT TO TERMINAL (A) 1 OF THE HEATER
CONTROL SW FLOWS TO TERMINAL (B) 16 → GROUND, ACTIVATING THE HEATER RELAY. AS A RESULT, THE CURRENT TO
TERMINAL 5 OF THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RELAY FLOWS TO TERMINAL 7 → TERMINAL (B) 13 OF THE HEATER CONTROL
SW → TERMINAL (B) 16 → GROUND, ACTIVATING THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RELAY. THIS CAUSES THE CURRENT TO FLOW
FROM TERMINAL 5 OF THE HEATER RELAY TO TERMINAL 4 → TERMINAL 1 OF THE BLOWER MOTORS → TERMINAL 2 →
TERMINAL 4 OF THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RELAY → TERMINAL 3 → GROUND, CAUSING THE BLOWER MOTORS TO
OPERATE AT HIGH SPEED.
* MEDIUM SPEED OPERATION (OPERATION AT M1, M2)
WHEN THE BLOWER SW (HEATER CONTROL SW) IS SET TO M1 POSITION, THE CURRENT TO TERMINAL (A) 1 OF THE HEATER
CONTROL SW FLOWS TO TERMINAL (B) 16 → GROUND, ACTIVATING THE HEATER RELAY. AS A RESULT, THE CURRENT FROM
TERMINAL 5 OF THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RELAY TO TERMINAL 6 → TERMINAL (B) 9 OF THE HEATER CONTROL SW →
TERMINAL (B) 16 → GROUND, ACTIVATING THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RELAY. THIS CAUSES THE CURRENT FROM
TERMINAL 5 OF THE HEATER RELAY TO TERMINAL 4 → TERMINAL 1 OF THE BLOWER MOTORS → TERMINAL 2 → TERMINAL 1
OF THE BLOWER RESISTOR → TERMINAL 2 → TERMINAL 1 OF THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RELAY → TERMINAL 3 →
GROUND, CAUSING THE BLOWER MOTORS TO OPERATE AT MEDIUM LOW SPEED. WHEN THE BLOWER SW (HEATER CONTROL
SW) IS SET TO M2 POSITION, THE CURRENT TO TERMINAL (A) 1 OF THE HEATER CONTROL SW FLOWS TO TERMINAL (B) 16 →
GROUND, ACTIVATING THE HEATER RELAY. AS A RESULT, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 5 OF THE BLOWER SPEED
CONTROL RELAY TO TERMINAL 8 → TERMINAL (B) 10 OF THE HEATER CONTROL SW → TERMINAL (B) 16 → GROUND,
ACTIVATING THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RELAY. THIS CAUSES THE CURRENT TO FLOW FROM TERMINAL 5 OF THE HEATER
RELAY TO TERMINAL 4 → TERMINAL 1 OF THE BLOWER MOTORS → TERMINAL 2 → TERMINAL 1 OF THE BLOWER RESISTOR →
TERMINAL 3 → TERMINAL 2 OF THE BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RELAY → TERMINAL 3 → GROUND, CAUSING THE BLOWER
MOTOR TO OPERATE AT MEDIUM HI SPEED. THE CURRENT TO THE BLOWER MOTORS AT THIS TIME IS STRONGER THAN IT WAS
FOR THE M1 POSITION, SO THE BLOWER MOTORS OPERATES FASTER FOR M2 THAN IT DOES FOR M1.
2. OPERATION AIR INLET CONTROL SERVO MOTOR

(SWITCHING FROM FRESH TO RECIRC)
WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM GAUGE FUSE TO TERMINAL 1 OF THE AIR INLET CONTROL
SERVO MOTOR. WHEN THE RECIRC/FRESH SW IS SWITCHED TO THE FRESH SIDE, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 1 OF
THE AIR INLET CONTROL SERVO MOTOR TO TERMINAL 3 → TERMINAL (A) 18 OF THE HEATER CONTROL SW → TERMINAL (B) 16
→ GROUND, THIS CAUSES THE MOTOR TO ROTATE AND THE DAMPER TO MOVE TO THE RECIRC SIDE. WHEN IT IS IN THE RECIRC
POSITION, THE CURRENT IS CUT INSIDE THE SERVO MOTOR, AND THE DAMPER STOPS AT THAT POSITION.
(SWITCHING FROM RECIRC TO FRESH)
WITH THE IGNITION SW ON, WHEN THE RECIRC/FRESH SW IS SWITCHED TO THE RECIRC SIDE, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM
TERMINAL 1 OF THE AIR INLET CONTROL SERVO MOTOR TO TERMINAL 2 → TERMINAL (A) 19 OF THE HEATER CONTROL SW →
TERMINAL (B) 16 → GROUND, THIS CAUSES THE MOTOR TO ROTATE AND DAMPER TO MOVE TO THE FRESH SIDE. WHEN IT IS IN
THE FRESH POSITION, THE CURRENT IS CUT INSIDE THE SERVO MOTOR, AND THE DAMPER STOPS AT THAT POSITION.
168
3. OPERATION OF AIR VENT MODE CONTROL SERVO MOTOR

WITH THE IGNITION SW TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM GAUGE FUSE TO TERMINAL 5 OF THE AIR VENT MODE
CONTROL SERVO MOTOR → TERMINAL 6 → GROUND, AND THE DAMPER MOVES TO THE POSITION OF THE MODE SELECTION SW
ON THE CONTROL SW WHICH IS ON. WHEN THE FOOT SW OF THE HEATER CONTROL SW IS TURNED ON WITH THE DEF POSITION,
A SIGNAL IS INPUT FROM TERMINAL 7 OF THE AIR VENT MODE CONTROL SERVO MOTOR TO TERMINAL (B) 4 OF THE HEATER
CONTROL SW. AS A RESULT, THE SERVO MOTOR OPERATES UNTIL THE DAMPER REACHES TO DEF POSITION. WHEN THIS
OCCURS, THE SIGNAL TO THE HEATER CONTROL SW IS SHUT OFF AND ROTATION OF THE MOTOR STOPS. SWITCHING TO OTHER
MOVEMENT IS CONTROLLED BY THE SERVO MOTOR ACCORDING TO THE FOLLOWING SIGNALS:
1. FACE POSITION, A SIGNAL INPUT FROM TERMINAL 1 OF THE SERVO MOTOR TO TERMINAL (B) 14 OF THE HEATER CONTROL
SW.
2. BI-LEVEL POSITION, A SIGNAL INPUT FROM TERMINAL 2 OF THE SERVO MOTOR TO TERMINAL (A) 12 OF THE HEATER
CONTROL SW.
3. FOOT POSITION, A SIGNAL INPUT FROM TERMINAL 3 OF THE SERVO MOTOR TO TERMINAL (A) 7 OF THE HEATER CONTROL
SW.
4. FOOT/DEF POSITION, A SIGNAL INPUT FROM TERMINAL 4 OF THE SERVO MOTOR TO TERMINAL (B) 11 OF THE HEATER
CONTROL SW.
4. AIR MIX CONTROL SERVO MOTOR

VOLTAGE IS APPLIED TO TERMINALS 11 AND 12 OF THE A/C SYSTEM AMPLIFIER FROM THE TEMPERATURE CONTROL LEVER
INSIDE THE HEATER CONTROL SW AND FROM THE POTENTIOMETER INSIDE THE AIR MIX CONTROL SERVO MOTOR. THIS
VOLTAGE IS KEPT AT A FIXED LEVEL BY THE A/C SYSTEM AMPLIFIER. WHEN THE TEMPERATURE CONTROL LEVER OF THE HEATER
CONTROL SW IS MOVED TO ’COOL’, THE VOLTAGE APPLIED TO TERMINAL 12 OF THE A/C SYSTEM AMPLIFIER FROM TERMINAL (B)
3 OF THE HEATER CONTROL SW CHANGES. AT THIS TIME, THE A/C SYSTEM AMPLIFIER COMPARES THE VOLTAGE FROM
TERMINAL 2 OF THE AIR MIX CONTROL SERVO MOTOR WITH THE VOLTAGE APPLIED TO TERMINAL 11 OF THE A/C SYSTEM
AMPLIFIER. THIS ACTIVATES THE A/C SYSTEM AMPLIFIER, SO THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 6 OF THE AMPLIFIER TO
TERMINAL 5 OF THE AIR MIX CONTROL SERVO MOTOR → TERMINAL 4 → TERMINAL 1 OF THE A/C SYSTEM AMPLIFIER, AND THE
AIR MIX CONTROL SERVO MOTOR CHANGES TO THE ’COOL’ SIDE. THEN WHEN THE VOLTAGE FROM THE POTENTIOMETER INSIDE
THE SERVO MOTOR EQUALS THE VOLTAGE FROM THE TEMPERATURE CONTROL LEVER INSIDE THE HEATER CONTROL SW, THE
A/C SYSTEM AMPLIFIER CUTS OFF POWER TO THE MOTOR. WHEN THE TEMPERATURE CONTROL LEVER IS MOVED TO THE ’HOT’
SIDE, THE A/C SYSTEM AMPLIFIER OPERATES THE SAME AS FOR ’COOL’ OPERATION, SO THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL
1 OF THE A/C SYSTEM AMPLIFIER TO TERMINAL 4 OF THE AIR MIX CONTROL SERVO MOTOR → TERMINAL 5 → TERMINAL 6 OF THE
A/C SYSTEM AMPLIFIER, CHANGING THE MOTOR TO THE ’HOT’ SIDE. WHEN THE VOLTAGE OF THE POTENTIOMETER AND VOLTAGE
OF THE TEMPERATURE CONTROL LEVEL ARE THE SAME, POWER TO THE MOTOR IS CUT OFF.
5. AIR CONDITIONING OPERATION

WHEN THE IGNITION SW IS TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FROM THE GAUGE FUSE FLOWS THROUGH THE THE A/C DUAL PRESSURE
SW TO TERMINAL 3 OF THE A/C AMPLIFIER. IF THE HEATER CONTROL SW IS THEN TURNED ON, THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM THE
FL HEATER FUSE THROUGH THE A.C. FUSE TO TERMINAL (B) 17 OF THE HEATER CONTROL SW. WHEN THE A/C IS TURNED ON,
THE CURRENT FLOWS FROM TERMINAL (B) 17 OF THE HEATER CONTROL SW TO TERMINAL (B) 6 → TERMINAL 2 OF THE A/C
AMPLIFIER, ACTIVATING THE A/C AMPLIFIER. THE CURRENT THEN FLOWS FROM TERMINAL 7 OF THE A/C AMPLIFIER TO TERMINAL
4 OF THE ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. RELAY → TERMINAL 3 → TERMINAL 1 OF A/C MAGNETIC CLUTCH → GROUND. THIS CAUSES
THE COMPRESSOR TO START. WHEN THE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE IS APPROX. 108C (226F), THE WATER TEMP. SW
(A/C) IS TURNED ON AND THE A/C CUT RELAY IS ACTIVATED. THIS TURNS THE COMPRESSOR OFF AND STOPS THE AIR
CONDITIONING. THE AIR CONDITIONING ALSO TURNS OFF, IF A SIGNAL IS INPUT TO THE A/C AMPLIFIER THAT THE AIR OUTLET
TEMPERATURE IS LOW (BELOW APPROX. 3C) OR THE REFRIGERANT PRESSURE IS ABNORMALLY LOW.
169
AIR CONDITIONING
FROM POW ER SOURCE SYSTEM (SEE PAGE 52)
Y
1 1
L− Y
40A FL HEATER
1 0A GAUGE
Y
F1 1
FUSE BLO CK
J4
JUNC TION
B CO N NECTOR
2 3
Y B B Y
Y
W−G
A
B
J1
JUNCTION Y
CONNECTOR I12
A
Y
Y
1 1 Y Y
I8
5 3 Y Y
HEATE R
2
RELAY
4 1
1 1 1
L−Y
L−B
L−Y L−Y
W −B
I14 I3
L− Y
L− Y
B LOW ER MOTO R
B LOW ER MOTO R
1 1
M M
(HEATER)
(A/C)
2 2
B3
B2
L−R
B4
L− R
BLOW ER RESISTOR W
L− R L−R 1 4 L− B
A I14 I14
J2 B
JUNCTION 3 2
L −R
CONNECTOR
A L−B L−R
W−B
L−Y
Y
8 IG1 9 IG1 3 IG1

B−W
C O NNECTOR
B−L
L −B
A
B5
JUNCTION
BLOW ER SPEED
4 2 1 CO NTROL RELAY
J8
1 A
5 R−L
IG1
W−B
W− B
M2
M1
HI
2
7 L−R W
IG1
4
6 W−Y B
IG1
6
8 R L−R
I12 IG1
3 10
W −B W −B
W −B
IG1
W −B
ID IE
170
Y Y
L−Y L−Y
Y Y
Y Y
I8
Y Y
Y
G
B−Y
G− B
W W
L−B L−B
B B
L− R L −R
B−O
G −R
Y−R
Y−B
Y−G
G− B
B−Y
G
W−G
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 2 5 10 11 12
A10
W ARM A/C S YSTEM AM PLIFIER
CO OL 9
J7
JU NCTION
CO NNECTO R
M W −B A A W −B
W−B
A15
AIR MIX CO NTRO L
SERVO M OTO R
ID
171
AIR CONDITIONING
Y Y
L−Y L− Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
G R− G
L −W
Y−R
Y− G
G−W
B− Y L
G −B G−B
I8
B B
R− L
W
W−L
L−B
G R− R
B
LG − R
L− R
LG−B
B− O
G −R
Y− B
W −G
G R− G
G R− R
L G −R
LG−B
G−W
W −G
W −L
G −R
G−B
L−W
B −O
Y −G
Y− R
L−R
Y −B
B −Y
R −L
L −B
W
G
8 5 7 3 2 4 6 1 5 1 3 6 16 7 8 15 2 11 12 4 9 14 13
S 8
S H O RT C O N NE C TO R (A/C )
S 9
SH O R T CO NN EC TO R (A /C)
172
Y Y
L− Y L− Y
Y Y
GR− G GR−G
L− W
Y−R
Y− G
G− W G −W
G −B G−B
B B
R −L R−L
W −L W−L
G R−R G R− R
L G−R LG − R
LG− B LG −B
L −W
Y−G
Y− R
Y
Y
L
2 3 1 9 A 1 A 9 B 10 B
FRESH
M
RECIRC
A14 AIR INL ET C ONTRO L 13

SERVO MO TOR G
A
FR OM " TAIL" FUSE

3 LO M1 M2
W−G
TO RH EOSTAT A BL OW ER SW
H 10 A , H11 B HEATER CONTROL SW AND A/C SW
173
AIR CONDITIONING
Y Y
L− Y L−Y
Y Y
GR− G GR− G
G −W G −R
G−B V−G
R−L
W −L W−L
GR−R G R− R
LG−R LG −R
LG− B L G−B
G− W
G −R
V−G
G −B
13 B 1 B 3 B 2 B 14 A 12 A 7 A
TEM P.
ACE BL FOO T
HI
BLOW ER SW TEM PERATURE CO NTROL LEVER MO DE S EL ECT ON SW
, H10 A H11 B
HEATER CONTRO L SW AND A/C SW
174
Y Y
L− Y
10 A A. C
F11
FUSE BLOCK
Y Y
GR−G GR− G
G− R G −R
V V
V− G V−G
W −R
LG
W−L W −B
GR−R
LG−R W −B
LG −B
GR −R
L G− R
LG− B
W −R
W −B
W −L
L−R
LG
11 B 4 B 6 B 18 B 17 B 8 A 18 A 19 A 16 B
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
REC
REC
FR C
FR C
F/D
DEF
M ODE S EL ECTION SW A/C SW RECIRC/FRESH SW
H 10 A H 11 B
HEATER CONTROL SW AND A/C SW
175
AIR CONDITIONING
Y
GR− G G R−G
G −R
V−G
W −R
LG
W −B
W −B
W −R
G−R
V−G
LG
I11
Y
5 7 4 3 2 1
W −B
M
CONNEC TOR
JUNCTIO N
A
A W −B 6
J7
A
W −B
DEF F/D FO OT B/L FACE DEF F/D FOO T B/L FACE
A16
AIR VENT M ODE CON TROL SERVO M OTOR
ID
176
A 9
A /C A M PL IF IE R
5 2 3 7 8 9 6 4
W−L
R−G
R−G
Y−L
L−Y
B
Y
R− B
GR
I17 I17
17 IG 2 20 IG 2 11 IG 2
G R− G
W−L
W−L
R−G
B− R
G R− G
Y−R
TE M P. C U T R E L AY
A /C TH E R M IS TO R
Y
EN G IN E C O O LA N T
4 2
2
A 11
E 8
15 IH 1 3 1
12 EA1 6 EA 1 1
R−B
B−R
P−L
I17
L
Y−R
R−B
4 10 IG 2 2 IG 2
FR O M P A R K/N EU T R AL
L−R
A /C D U A L PR E SS U RE S W
1 IG 2 9 IG 2
PO S ITIO N SW
W −B
W −B
B−W
G− Y
I13
A 2
W −B
9 EA1 17 IH 2
A
J 8
J U N C TIO N
B− W
C O N N E C TO R
A
G −Y
2 EY1
B−W
W−B
1 1
A 1
W 4
A/C M A G N E TIC
C LU TCH W ATE R TEM P . S W
(A /C )
2
W−B
EC IE
177
AIR CONDITIONING
SERVICE HINTS
A 1 A/C MAGNETIC CLUTCH
1-GROUND : APPROX. 3.8
A 2 A/C DUAL PRESSURE SW
1-4 : OPEN WITH THE REFRIGERANT PRESSURE AT LESS THAN APPROX. 2.1 KG/CM (30 PSI, 206 KPA)
OR MORE THAN APPROX. 27 KG/CM (38 PSI, 2684 KPA)
A11 A/C THERMISTOR
2-1 : APPROX. 1.5 K 25°C (77°F)
B 4 BLOWER RESISTOR
1-4 : 2.0
1-2 : 0.88
1-3 : 0.32
H10 (A) , H11 (B) HEATER CONTROL SW AND A/C SW
(A) 1 (A) 9-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE IGNITION SW AT ON POSITION
(A) 1-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE HEATER CONTROL SW AT LOW POSITION
(B) 9-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE HEATER CONTROL SW AT MEDIUM LOW POSITION
(B) 10-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE HEATER CONTROL SW AT MEDIUM HIGH POSITION
(B) 13-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE HEATER CONTROL SW AT HIGH POSITION
(A) 18-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE RECIRC SW AT ON POSITION
(A) 19-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE FRESH SW AT ON POSITION
(A) 14-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE FACE SW AT ON POSITION
(A) 12-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE B/L SW AT ON POSITION
(A) 7-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE FOOT SW AT ON POSITION
(B) 4-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE DEF SW AT ON POSITION
(B) 11-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE FOOT/DEF SW AT ON POSITION
(A) 1, (B) 18-GROUND : APPROX. 12 VOLTS WITH THE A/C SW AT ON POSITION
(A) 8, (B) 16-GROUND : ALWAYS CONTINUITY
: PARTS LOCATION
A1 22 B2 24 J1 25
A2 22 B3 24 J2 25
A9 24 B4 24 J4 25
A10 24 B5 24 J7 25
A11 24 E8 24 J8 25
A14 24 F11 25 S8 25
A15 24 H10 A 25 S9 25
A16 24 H11 B 25 W4 23
: RELAY BLOCKS

IG1
32 COWL WIRE AND A/C SUB WIRE (BEHIND GLOVE BOX)
IG2
IH1
IH2
: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
I3 I13
32 COWL WIRE
I8 I14
32 COWL WIRE
I11 I17 32 A/C SUB WIRE
I12
178
179
J GROUND POINT
W−B W−B
HE ADLIG HT L O L H P ARKIN G L IG HT LH
W−B W−B FR O NT TU RN SIG NAL

HE ADLIG HT L O RH E3 E5
L IGHT L H
W−B BR
PA RKING L IG HT RH 2 E FI M AIN R ELAY
W −B
W −B
FR O NT TURN SIG NAL W−B
E1
L IGHT R H
W −B W −B
W−B
E4
EA EB
TR ANSFER NEU TRA L W−B
PO SITIO N SW
10
CE NTER D IFF. L OC K W−B W −B W −B W−B W −B O IL L EVEL W AR NING
E22 EC1 E17 E17
INDICATO R SW SW
W−B
W−B
CE NTER D IFF. L OC K W−B W −B W ATER TEM P. SW
E17 (A/C)
CO N TRO L M O TO R
4 IH1
3 9
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR BR BR BR B R− B HEATED O XYGEN S ENSOR
Ea 1 EC 1
(COMBINATION M ETER) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
W−B
DA TA LINK W−B B R− B HEATED O XYGEN S ENSOR
( SG )
CO N NECTO R 3 (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)
NO ISE FILTER W−B B R− B E NG IN E C O NTROL

I14 E17 (E1)
(IG NITIO N SY STE M ) M ODU LE
BR
B R− B D ATA L INK
(E1)
EC C ON NEC TO R 1
BR −B
W−B
W−B
FR O NT D IFF. L O CK W−B
PO SITIO N SW BR
(E01 )
A
6
FR O NT D IFF. L O CK W−B W−B W −B A
B1 Bb 1 BR BR
CO N TRO L M O TO R E NG IN E C O NTROL
I18 (E02 )
M ODU LE
W−B A
DIFF. L O CK ECU BR
EC (E03 )
W−B W− B A
FR O NT W IPER M O TO R I15 W−B DO O R KEY LO C K AN D
J8 UN LO CK SW RH
W−B J UN C TIO N
BL O W ER RESISTOR C O NN ECTO R 11
W −B W−B DO O R L OCK CO NTR OL
BK1 B6
SW RH
W−B W− B A A W −B
G L OVE BO X L IGH T SW I14 W−B DOOR UNLOCK
W−B
DETECTION SW FRONT RH
W−B
CL O CK I14 9
A W −B W−B GR
I13 IG 2
4 1
AU TO AN TEN NA W−B W −B W −B W−B R −B R − B A /C AM P LIFIER
I16 IF1 A IG 2 I17
CO N TRO L SW
W−B
RE AR W IN DO W W−B R−B
I16 S 4 A ,S 5 B A /C TH ERM IS TO R
DE FO GG ER SW
SHO RT CONNECTO R (SRS)
W−B BR 2 2 BR
HA ZARD SW B A (E1)
AIRBAG
10 SENSOR
W−B W−B BR BR 1 1 BR ASSEMBLY
W −B
BL O W ER SPE ED IG1 I12 B A (E2)

CO N TRO L RE LAY
W−B W −B
EN GINE CO N TRO L I12
M ODU LE
BR BR BR
W −B
(G ND1 ) I3 RAD IO AN D P LAYE R

AB S EC U BR
(G ND2 )
BR S TER EO C OM PO NENT
A M PLIFIER
IE IE
180
J7 3
W− B JU NC TIO N BR BR (SH IE LD ED ) BR
(G N D) E11 EY 1 E12 E13 O IL P RE S SU R E SE ND E R
HE ATE R CO NTR O L C O NN EC TO R
SW AN D A /C SW W− B W−B A
(SH IEL D ED )
(E) I11
BR NO ISE FIL TER
(O IL PR ES SU R E
W− B W−B A S EN DE R )
AIR V E NT M O D E I11
CO N TR O L S ER VO M O TO R
W−B DO O R L OC K C O N TR O L
W− B E10 B2
A/C S Y STE M RE L AY
AM PL IFIE R
BR
W−B
W−B
(E)
CO M B IN A TIO N W −B A PO W ER W IN DO W
(E P)
M ETE R 1 EA 4 W−B M A STE R S W
B2 (E2 )
W −B
BR
KE Y IN TER L O CK W −B A
SO LEN O ID W−B DO O R K EY LO CK AN D
[IG NITIO N SW ] B2
UN L O C K SW L H
W−B
11
A/T IND ICA TO R W −B A W−B W−B DOOR UNLOCK
BJ1 B2
[C O M B. M ETER ] DETECTION SW FRONT LH
IG NITIO N KEY W −B A W −B
J2 1 P O W ER RE L AY
CY L IN D E R L IG H T JU NC TIO N
CO NN E CTO R
W −B
CO O L IN G FAN W− B A W−B W −B
I3 1 HE A TER R EL A Y
(R AD IO A ND P LA YER )
W− B W−B A A W−B
CIG A R ETTE LIG HTER I11 RH E O STAT
UN L O CK W AR N IN G SW W −B A A W−B B RA KE FL U ID L EV EL
[IG NITIO N SW ] W AR N IN G SW
W −B A A W−B S EAT BE LT W AR N IN G
RE AR HE A TE R S W
RE L AY
A W−B CR U ISE CO NTRO L

FR O NT/REA R W IPER W− B W−B A
AND W ASHER S W I7 A CTUA TO R
[CO M B. SW ]
A W−B CE N TE R D IFF. L O C K
A
LIGHT CONTROL SW W− B CO NTR O L RE LA Y
W− B
BR
[COMB. SW]
A W−B W−B RE M O TE CO NTR O L
W −B I2
DIM M E R S W M IR R O R SW
I6
[C O M B. S W ]
W−B D ATA LIN K
(C G )
BR C O NN E CTO R 3
(E S) I6
CO M B IN A TIO N A W−B W −B
M ETE R I3 1 FL ASH R EL AY
BR
(ET)
A
W −B
W−B M OO N R O O F C O NTR O L
BR BR S W A ND PE R S O NA L
CR U ISE C O N TRO L E CU I5 L IGH T
6 IE1 W−B
BR B9 M OO N R O O F M O TO R
CR U ISE C O N TRO L S W
W −B
[C O M B. S W ]
W−B
B9 M OO N R O O F L IM IT SW
W −B
W−B
W −B
W −B
B9 V AN ITY L IG H T LH
W −B
W−B M OO N R O O F C O NTR O L
B8
RE L AY
W−B
W−B
B8 V AN ITY L IG H T RH
W −B W−B
I12
W−B W−B
AB S R EL A Y E23
W−B
W−B
W−B
BR
BR
W−B
AB S AC TU ATO R
ID ID
181
J GROUND POINT
W−B 3
W−B W−B POWER SEAT CONTROL
HIGH M O U NTE D S TO P BL1
LIGH T SW (PASSENGER’S SEAT)
1 W−B W−B
REAR W IN D OW B X1 B20 W O O FE R AM P L IFIER
DEFO G G ER (− )
W−B W−B 2 W−B W−B

REAR W IPE R M O TO R B28 BT2 B27 B19 (−S)
W−B
REA R HE ATER RE L AY
W−B W−B
BACK D O O R (E)
COU R TE SY SW 1 BS2 3 BM1
W−B
W−B
4 B R1
W −B
B17
W−B
W−B 5 W−B
FUEL PU M P B O1 B16
W−B
ABS DE CEL ER ATION B13
SENS O R
4 W−B
FUEL SE ND ER B O1 B13 O/D M AIN SW
W−B W−B W−B

B13 REAR DIFF. LOCK
SHIFT LO C K ECU
POSITION SW
6 W−B
W−B W−B 17 BQ1 W−B W−B
PO W E R SE AT CO N TRO L B35 Bh2 B1 REA R DIFF. L O CK
SW (D R IV ER’ S S EAT) CO N TRO L M OTO R
W−B W−B
BUCK LE SW L H B31 REA R CO M B IN ATIO N
LIGHT LH
(W/ POWER SEAT) 3 B 1
1
(W/O POWER SEAT) 3 B1 W−B W−B
BV1 LICENSE PL ATE
LIGHT
W −B
W−B
W−B
W −B
W −B
REAR COMBINATION
W−B
B31 LIGHT RH
W−B
BF
BG
J 8 BLUE S4 A YELLOW S5 5 YELLOW

J 2 BLUE J 7 BLUE
A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
1 2
(HINT: SEE PAGE 7) (HINT: SEE PAGE 7) (HINT: SEE PAGE 7)
2 1
182
: PARTS LOCATION
J2 25 J8 25 S5 B 25
J7 25 S4 A 25
: RELAY BLOCKS
2 18 R/B NO. 2 (FRONT SIDE OF THE FENDER)

Ea1 30 TRANSMISSION WIRE AND SPEED SENSOR WIRE (NEAR THE TRANSMISSION)
IE1 32 ROOF WIRE AND COWL WIRE (LEFT KICK PANEL)
IG1
32 COWL WIRE AND A/C SUB WIRE (BEHIND GLOVE BOX)
IG2
BV1 36 LUGGAGE ROOM NO. 3 WIRE AND FLOOR NO. 3 WIRE (UNDER THE LOWER BACK PANEL)
BX1 36 REAR WINDOW NO. 1 WIRE AND BACK DOOR NO. 2 WIRE (BACK DOOR RIGHT)
Bb1 36 COWL WIRE AND FRAME WIRE (RIGHT FENDER)
Bj1 38 FLOOR NO. 2 WIRE AND SEAT NO. 1 WIRE (UNDER THE PASSENGER’S SEAT)
: GROUND POINTS
: SPLICE POINTS
E1 I14
32 COWL WIRE
E3 I15
E4 I16 32 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIRE
30 ENGINE ROOM MAIN WIRE
E5 I17 32 A/C SUB WIRE
E10 I18 32 ENGINE WIRE
E11 B1 36 FRAME WIRE
E12 B2 36 FRONT DOOR LH WIRE
30 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH WIRE
E13 B6 36 FRONT DOOR RH WIRE
E17 30 ENGINE WIRE B8
36 ROOF WIRE
E22 30 TRANSMISSION WIRE B9
E23 30 B13
I3 B17
I5 B19
36 FLOOR NO.
NO 2 WIRE
I6 COWL WIRE B20
32
I7 B27 36 BACK DOOR NO. 1 WIRE
I11 B28 36 BACK DOOR NO. 2 WIRE
I13 B35 38 SEAT NO. 1 WIRE
183
K OVERALL ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
184
185
186

1 LAND CRUISER STATION WAGON ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
Power Source Starting Ignition Charging

1 2 3 4
11 AM2 IG2 6 B- R B- R B- R
1
B
CHARGE WARNING LIGHT

W- R
ACC [COMB. METER]
B- R
7. 5A IGN
FUSIBLE LINK F11
B 4 AM1 IG1 C11 B BLUE FUSE
BLOCK
ST1 1
F6 A ,F8 C
6 EA2 3 EA2 1 EA2 I3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 2
IGNITION COIL
B- L
I12
IGNITION SW 1
B- L
B
B- W
B- W
W
B- R
B- R
13 C
B
B- L
F 7 B GRAY
C11 B , C13 C
2 1 2 C13 C
21 IH1
<2- 8>
Control Module
To Engine
CHARGE WARNING
LIGHT
B- W
2 1 [COMB. METER] 5 EA1
8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 7 B
B- W
Y- L
50A EA2
AM1
B- W
4 EA1
1 I2 D2
6 3 IGNITER 5 DISTRIBUTOR
Y- L
P B C GENERATOR
2 P1
PARK/NEUTRAL
2
W- R
POSITION SW N
W
EX IGF IGT NE G1 G2 G-
5 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 G 1 A GRAY
1
2
B- R
B- Y
B- G
G
R
L
Meter<22- 6>
To Combination
3 7. 5A
1 2 3 CHARGE
14 IH2 13 IH2
4 B- R 2
B- G
B- Y
2 15 IH1 2
B- R
B- L
FUSIBLE LINK
F6
B- R
B- R
B- R
B
1 C 1 A 1 B G2 B
B- R
<2- 5>
To Engine Control Module
Module<2- 5><2- 6>

To Engine Control
A ,F7
FL AM1 1. 25B
FL MAIN 2. 0L
FL AM2 0. 3P
Y- L
B- L
W
B
B , F8
<23- 8>
Amplifier
To A/C
<2- 8>
Module
Control
To Engine
1
N1
C
NOISE FILTER
1 B (Ignition System)
1
B
A 2 STARTER
W- B
1 A
2
L IG A
S 1 B BLACK S2 A G1 A , G2 B 3
S A
4 IH1 GENERATOR 1
1 B B
BATTERY
W- B
S1 B ,S2 A 1
STARTER EC Air intake chamber
K
2 LAND CRUISER STATION WAGON (Cont. next page )
Power Source Engine Control

1 2 3 4
W Y- R
A
2
R- Y R- Y R- Y
EA2 B
ACC ENGINE CONTROL MODULE

E 4 A DARK GRAY E 5 C DARK GRAY E 6 B DARK GRAY
4 AM1 IG1 2 B- Y
W
ST1 B- R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 1 1
Y- R
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
R- Y
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 7 8 9 10 11 12
W
11 AM2 IG2 6 B- R
10A GAUGE
7. 5A IGN
15A OBD
F11
W- R
FUSE C10 A , C11 B
R- Y
R- Y
I12 BLOCK
J1 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
IGNITION SW
JUNCTION [COMB. METER]
3 EA3 6 EA2 3 EA2
CONNECTOR 5 6
2 3 2 A A
Y Y Y- R

A B C
2 2
B
B- R
2 2 B- L B- L
1 2 D
B- L
RELAY
EFI MAIN
BR
2 2
Y- R Y
50A AM1
E
15A EFI
14 IH1 R
3 4 F
B- R
2 2 MALFUNCTION
1 1 C10 A GRAY C11 B BLUE
Y INDICATOR LAMP
Y- R
[COMB. METER]
R
2 2 2 1
B- R
Y- R
Y- L
C8
W- R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
W
1 EB1 CIRCUIT
OPENING
2 7 EA2 Y- R RELAY
4 3 17
R R- W R- W R- W
3 IH1 G
R- G
F4 W- R W- R
FUSIBLE LINK FUEL PUMP H
RELAY 5 R- B Y- R
4 I
F6 A ,F8 C
B- R B- R B- R B- R B- R
W
2 13 ID2
1 Y- L
B- R
B- R
B- R
B- R
B- R
B- R
B- L
D3
R- G DATA LINK
2 3 1 16 CONNECTOR 3
FUSIBLE LINK
F6
INJECTOR NO. 1
I4
INJECTOR NO. 2
I5
INJECTOR NO. 3
I6
INJECTOR NO. 4
I7
INJECTOR NO. 5
I8
INJECTOR NO. 6
I9
1 C 1 A 1 B F 7 B GRAY 2 2 2 2 2 2
BAT
R- B
R- B
3 BO1
A ,F7
FL AM1 1. 25B
FL MAIN 2. 0L
FL AM2 0. 3P
CG SG SDL
1
R- W
R- G
4 5 2
[FUEL SENDER]
FUEL PUMP
F18
3 1 1 1 1 1 1
(SHIELDED)
B ,F8
2 Y- L
J
W- G
W- R
W- L
W
Y
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE F5 M
W- B
W- B
Y- R
FUEL PUMP K
RESISTOR 6
C
E 7 D DARK GRAY Y
CONNECTOR
JUNCTION
J2
CONNECTOR
JUNCTION
J8
A A L
W- B
BR
1
R- W W- G
M
BR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 W- R
W- B
A A N
BATTERY 5 BO1 8 IH2
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 W- B W- L
O
W- B
W- B
BR
W- B
W
P
EB Front side of Under the center BF Left ID IE Right EC Air intake
left fender console box kick kick chamber
panel panel

2 LAND CRUISER STATION WAGON(Cont’ d)
Engine Control
5 6 7 Y-R 8
A YR YR Y-R Y-R Y-R
B R-Y A W-B W-B
Y-R
YR
A A J9 A A A A
Y-R
JUNCTION
(SHIELDED)
CONNECTOR
(SHIELDED)
1
Y-R
(SHIELDED)
(SHIELDED)
2 EZ1 1 EZ1
Y-R
Y-R
K2
(SHIELDED)
22 IH1 KNOCK
L-W
<1-2>
FromIgniter
C3 SENSOR2
B
VSV(Fuel PressureControl)
V4
W-B CRANKSHAFT
From POSITION BR-B
3 SENSOR 1 2
Y-R
Y-R
Distributo
(SHIELDED)
(SHIELDED)
(Bank1Sensor2)
HEATEDOXYGENSENSOR
H6
(Bank1Sensor1)
HEATEDOXYGENSENSOR
H5
VSV(EGR)
V3
BR-B
IDLEAIRCONTROLVALVE
I1
r NE2
Y
<1-2> 2 5 2 4 2 4
C Y-R <1-3> NE- NE K1
+B E1 +B E1
KNOCKSENSOR1 2 1
2 1 1
D B-L HT2 OX2 HT OX
B
L 1 3 1 3
3 1 6 4
B-G
B-Y
L
W
G
R
L
E Y 4 EZ1 3 EZ1
Y-R
R-Y
B-L
GR
BR
W
O
Y
L
R-B
G-Y
R-G
Y-L
L
(SHIELDED) (SHIELDED)
L-W
F R
LR
3 D 12 D 1 D 4 D 2 D 17 A 23 A 12 B 11 B 10 B 6 B 4B 5B 6C 14 C 22 A 21 A 4A 6A 5A 7A 7 B 13 C 1B 5C
MRLY +B IGSW W BATT IGF IGT NE G1 G2 G- NE2- NE2+ KNK1 KNK2 EGR FPU ISC4 ISC2 ISC3 ISC1 HT2 OX2 HT1 OX1
E4 A , E5 C , E6 B , E7 D ENGINECONTROLMODULE
FC FPR #60 #50 #40 #30 #20 #10 SDL THA E21 VG E2 THG THW OIL IDL VTA VCC E03 E02 E01 E1 TE1 STP L4 AC SPD TACO OILW STA NSW
14 A 13 D 15 A 1 A 2 A 25 A 11 A 12 A 6 D 3 C 16 C 2 C 9 C 19 A 4 C 12 C 11 C 10 C 1 C 16 A 26 A 13 A 24 A 7 C 14 D 9 D 7 D 8 D 10 D 5 D 11 D 22 D
G R-W Y-R Y-R
L-Y
BR
BR
BR
BR
G
W-G
W-R
G-O
W-L
Y-R
Y-L
W
Y
G-W
3 5 2
B-W
B-W
L-W
H W-R
B-R
B-L
Y-L
B
8 12
CONNECTOR1
DATALINK
D1
1 THA E21 VG
I Y-R +B TE1 +B
BR-B
BR
BR-B
G-W
R-W
R-W
G-Y
G-B
R-G
E2
A/TFLUIDTEMP. SENSOR
A3
E1
<17-3>
FromStopLight SW
PositionSW<20-3>
FromTransferL4
<23-8>
Temp. Cut Relay
FromEngineCoolant
[Comb. Meter]<22-5>
ToSpeedometer
PositionSW<1-1>
FromPark/Neutral
<1-1>
FromIgnitionSW
4 M1
Meter<22-6>
ToCombination
MASSAIRFLOW 2 3
BR-B
METER
BR-B
BR-B
E1
EGRGASTEMP SENSOR
G-W
1 2 BR-B 1
BR-B
J Y-L G-Y
BR
ECU<11-2>
FromCruiseControl
Y-R E3
K
BR-B
ENGINECOOLANT
TEMP. SENSOR
L Y
BR-B
G-W
2 1 BR-B BR-B
M W-G BR-B
BR-B BR-B
N W-R R-W 1 2 3 4 BR-B

O W-L E2 IDL VTA VC
P W T1
THROTTLE
W-B
POSITION EC Air intakechamber
SENSOR
K
3 LAND CRUISER STATION WAGON
Power Shift Lock Light Auto Headlight

Source Turn Off
1 2 3 4
W W
W
W
ACC 3 L- R
2 2
4 AM1 IG1 2 B- Y 3 EA3
1 1
W
ST1 1 1 1 3 1
HEAD RELAY
W
15A 15A
15A ECU- IG
10A ECU- B
HEAD HEAD
15A CIG
I12 F11 (LH) (RH)
6 EA2 IGNITION SW FUSE
BLOCK 4 2 3 2
B
2 2 2 2 2
3 2 2
B- R
GR
2
R- W
R- W
R- Y
B- W
B- W R- W
R- L
2

CONNECTOR
JUNCTION
J3
R- W
B A 11 EA1
50A J6 5 EA2
R- W
AM1 JUNCTION
<17- 3
Light SW
From Stop
CONNECTOR
B A
B- W
GR
R- W
1
B- W
B- R
1
(Headlight)
DIODE
D7
FUSIBLE LINK
R- W
R- W
2
R- L
R- L
15 ID2 12 ID2
W
F6 A ,F8 B
G- W
B- W
HEADLIGHT LO RH
H4
GR
HEADLIGHT LO LH
H3
HEADLIGHT HI RH
H2
HEADLIGHT HI LH
H1
2
R- L
2 L1
1 3 1 6 LIGHT RETAINER 2 2 2 2
1 6 RELAY 7
IG ACC STP
3
R- W
SHIFT LOCK IG B HRLY
CONTROL SW
1 1 1 1
G- R 3
P1
4
G- W 1
2 P2 DCTY TRLY H T
S14
SHIFT LOCK ECU G 2
P 5 8 3 2
W- B
W- B
L- R
R- Y
R- Y
B- L
W
SLS+
R- W
[COMB. METER]
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR LIGHT
C13
R- B
B- O
B- L
R
L 1 2 L- R
1 B 1 A SLS- C14 6
KLS+ E COMBINATION SW 13 2 14
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
Front LH<6- 3>
To Door Courtesy SW
<4- 2>
From TAIL Relay
CONTROL SW
LIGHT
G- B
4 5 OFF
FL AM1 1. 25B
FL MAIN 2. 0L
F6 A ,F8 B
TAIL
FUSIBLE 5
11 ID2 W- B
LINK HEAD
G- B
DIMMER SW
LOW
8
HIGH
I12
R- Y
KEY INTERLOCK FLASH
SOLENOID
R- Y
W- B
[IGNITION SW] 11 9 12
W- B
7
W- B
W- B
W- B
A A 4 EA2
R- Y
J7 J7 A
W- B
W- B
R- Y
JUNCTION JUNCTION
BATTERY CONNECTOR CONNECTOR R- Y R- Y
W- B
ID Left kick BF Under the center Left kick ID EB Front side EA Front side
panel console box panel of left of right
fender fender

Power Source Taillight SRS

1 2 3 4
B- R
L- R
W
1 1 1
ACC 3 L- R FUSIBLE LINK
10A ECU- B
7. 5A IGN
15A CIG
4 AM1 IG1 F6 A , F8 C F 7 B GRAY F11
1 FUSE BLOCK
ST1 1
1
15A TAIL
2 1
F11 2 2 2
W
B- R
GR
11 AM2 IG2 6 B- R FUSE BLOCK
TAIL
RELAY
W- R
2
I12 1 3 2 A C10
IGNITION SW J3 SRS WARNING LIGHT
1 1
B- L
3 EA3 6 EA2 3 EA2 [COMB. METER]
JUNCTION
B CONNECTOR[
J1 B A 3
B
W- L
G
JUNCTION
R
CONNECTOR W- L
GR
2 B
W- L
B- Y
(SRS)
SHORT CONNECTOR
(SRS)
SHORT CONNECTOR
S4
S6
2
To Light Retainer 10 EA1 7 ID2
50A AM1
A ,S5
A ,S7
Relay<3- 3> 3 B 4 B 1 B 2 B
To Tra ler Socket
SHORT CONNECTOR(SRS)
G
(Tail and 11 IH1 12 IH1
S 4 A YELLOW S 5 B YELLOW Stop Light)<9- 8> 3 A 4 A 1 A 2 A
B
G
1
4 BQ1
B- W
W- L
W- L
B- L
B- Y
GR
G
2 G
1 2 3 4
W- R
9 10 8 7 11 5
W
G
IG2 ACC LA TC TC AB
A17
2
AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY
4 3 2 1 E1 P+ P- D+ D- E2
3 3 BV1 D1
5 2 1 4 3 6
DATA LINK
B
W- R
B- R
BR
CONNECTOR 1
S 6 A YELLOW S 7 B YELLOW 1 2
4
G
G
SPIRAL
2 CABLE
1 2 1 2
[REAR COMB. LIGHT RH]

TAILLIGHT RH
R9
[REAR COMB. LIGHT LH]

TAILLIGHT LH
R8
BR
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
L2
B- L
2
PARKING LIGHT RH
P3
PARKING LIGHT LH
P2
3 3
2 2
1 C 1 A 1 B 2 1
A18 A19
FL AM1 1. 25B
FL MAIN 2. 0L
AIRBAG SQUIB AIRBAG SQUIB

FL AM2 0. 3P
3 3
F6 A , F7 B , F8 C 5 5 (Front Passenger’ s (Steering
1 Airbag Assembly) Wheel Pad)
W- B
FUSIBLE LINK
BR
W- B
W- B
1 BV1
W- B
W- B
2 A 1 A
S4 A ,S5 B
SHORT CONNECTOR
2 B 1 B (SRS)
BR
BR
W- B
BATTERY W- B W- B
W- B
W- B
Front side of EB EA Front side of BG Lower back panel center Right kick IE ID Left kick
left fender right fender panel panel
K

*1 : Separate Type Ampl f er
*2 : Bui t−In Type Amplifier
Power Illumination *3 : A/T Indicator Illumnation
Source *4 : Meter Illuminat on
1 2 3 4
1
RADIO AND PLAYER STEREO COMPORNENT AMPLIFIER
1
15A TAIL
2 R 1 A GRAY R 3 B GRAY S11 A S12 B
F11
FUSE BLOCK
TAIL
R
RELAY 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 5
W
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
5 6 7 8 9 10 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 3 2
1 1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
G
G
3 EA3 J1 J4

B JUNCTION CONNECTOR A JUNCTION CONNECTOR
A
R
W
B B B B A A A A
G
G
RELAY
LIGHT RETAINER
L1
G
1 8 1
15 ID1
RHEOSTAT
R7
(*1)
T 14
G
FUSIBLE LINK
F8
G
FL MAIN 2. 0L
AMPLIFIER
STEREO COMPONENT
S11 A , S12
IF1
(*2)
G
G
E L 6 A
TRANSMISSION PATTERN SELECT SW

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED
E9
2 2 3
G
[O/D MAIN SW]
A/T SHIFT LEVER ILLUMINATION
O4
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SW

R5
AUTO ANTENNA CONTROL SW

A21
A/C SW
HEATER CONTROL SW AND
H10
COMBINATION METER
C11 B , C12 D , C13 C
ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION
A20
G
G
RADIO AND PLAYER
R1
REAR HEATER SW
R4
ILLUMINATION
CIGALETTE LIGHTER
C7
B
2 D 2 C
GLOVE BOX LIGHT

G3
2 B
10 A
HAZARD SW
H9
A ,R3
1 1 1 2 6 1 1 13 3 1
G- W
B- L
(*3)
(*4)
(*1)
BATTERY
4 3 4 3 1 2 2 3 6 2
RADIO AND PLAYER

R2
5 B
2
1 D 12 B
W
W- B
W- G
W- B
W- G
W- G
W- G
W- G
GLOVE BOX LIGHT SW

G4
1
2
COMBINATION SW
C14
OFF 9
SW
CONTROL
LIGHT
W- G
W- G
W- G
W- G
W- G
W- G
(*2)
TAIL
2
W- G
W- G
HEAD
W- G
W- G
8 ID2 1 IF1
(*1)
11
W- G
W- G
W- B
A A A A A A A A A A A
W- B
J2
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
JUNCTION
J8
A J5
A A
W- B
JUNCTION CONNECTOR
J7
JUNCTION W- B
CONNECTOR
A A
COMBINATION METER
W- B
W- B
W- B
C11 B BLUE C12 D BROWN C13 C
W- B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ID Left kick panel Right kick panel IE

Power Interior Light *1 : w/ Moon Roof

Source *2 : w/o Moon Roof
1 2 3 4
4
L- Y B B L- Y L- Y
ID2
B L- Y L- Y L- Y L- Y
B L- Y I11
J3 IGNITION KEY CYLINDER
3 EA1 JUNCTION 1 LIGHT RELAY
L- Y
CONNECTOR B L- Y 16 15 R- W 2 1 R- L B
B
L- Y
3 R- Y
C13
L- Y
L- Y
L- Y
L- Y
OPEN DOOR WARNING LIGHT 4 II2
[COMB. METER] D10
DIODE
L- Y
2 (Interior Light)
2 IE1 1
3 B
BL1
L- Y
(*1)
(*1)
L- Y
1 BJ2 1 BP2 13 BK1 1 BN2
10A L- Y L- Y L- Y L- Y
DOME
L- Y
L- Y
L- Y
L- Y
LIGHT FRONT RH
DOOR COURTESY
D13
LIGHT FRONT LH
DOOR COURTESY
D12
(*2)
LIGHT REAR RH
DOOR COURTESY
D15
LIGHT REAR LH
DOOR COURTESY
D14
L- Y
L- Y
L- Y
L- Y
(*1)
2 2 2 2 DCTY LP
FRONT INTERIOR LIGHT

F17(*2)
F16(*1)
1 2 2
REAR INTERIOR LIGHT

R16
1 2 2 4 3
[MOON ROOF CONTROL SW]
PERSONAL LIGHT
M3
2
VANITY LIGHT RH
V7
VANITY LIGHT LH
V6
1 1 1 1
R- L
R- L
R- L
R- L
DOOR
DOOR
OFF
OFF
W
ON
ON
R- B
R- B
4 BJ2 2 BP2 14 BK1 2 BN2
2 1 1
R- Y
4 1 1 8
R- Y R- W
R- L
B- W
(*1) BR1
2
R- Y
R- Y
W- B
W- B
R- Y
R- Y
R- L
R- L
R- L
R- L
R- L
(* 2)
W- B
(*1)
4
2 BL1 9 II2 1 ID2 2 BS2
W- B
CYLINDER LIGHT
IGNITION KEY
I10
R- L
(*1)
SW REAR RH
DOOR COURTESY
D19
SW REAR LH
DOOR COURTESY
D18
1 1
R- W
2
1
R- Y
R- Y
B- L
W- B
4 IE1 3 IE1 1 BT2

1 2
R- W
R- Y R- Y R- Y
FL AM1 1. 25B
2
6 IE1
COURTESY SW
BACK DOOR
B6
F6 1 2
W- B
R- L R- L R- L R- L R- B
FUSIBLE LINK
R- L
D9
1 DIODE
D8 (Interior Light)
W- B
W- B
DIODE 1
(Interior Light) From Door Lock Control
Relay <14-3> A
2 From Seat Belt Warning J7
R- G
R- B
From Door Lock R- G R- B 2 BT2
A Relay <17-2> JUNCTION
Control Relay<14- 3>
W- B
J2 From Light Retainer CONNECTOR
JUNCTION Relay <3-3> A
BATTERY 3 II2 3 ID2
CONNECTOR
A 1 BS2
W- B
R- G
R- B
W- B
W- B
1 1
D17 D16
4 BR1
DOOR COURTESY DOOR COURTESY
W- B
W- B
SW FRONT RH SW FRONT LH
W- B
ID Left kick panel IE Right kick panel ID Left kick BF Under the center
panel console box
K
Power Source Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Light

1 2 3 4
W
ACC TRAILER SOCKET(Turn Signal Light)
B 4 AM1 IG1 2 B- Y 2
ST1 1 T 5 A BLACK T 6 B BLACK
1
7. 5A TURN
6 EA2
I12 F11 1 1
15A
IGNITION SW FUSE
HAZ- HORN 2
B
BLOCK 2
2 2
G- W
2
2 2
18 2
W
8 IF1 G- O G- O
IF1 EA1

50A
G- O
C14
G- W
AM1 H9 TURN SIGNAL SW
HAZARD SW 10 8 [COMB. SW]
1 OFF RH
HAZARD TURN
2 ON LH
G- R
9 5
G- B
6
G- Y
5 1 8
G
W
G- B
G- Y
G
2 2 7 IF1 16 IF1 17 IF1 6 IF1
G- Y
3 G- R
G- B
G G- Y
2
G- B
4
G G
G- Y
G- Y
2
G- B
1 1
G- B
G- B
G- Y
G- Y
2 1 8 9
B- L
B L
FLASH 7 EA1 20 ID2 21 ID2 8 EA1 C11
RELAY TURN SIGNAL
E LH RH
INDICATOR LIGHT
G- B
G- Y
3 [COMB. METER]
1
G- B
G- Y
1
1 9 BQ1 10 BQ1
FL AM1 1. 25B
G- B
G- Y
F6
LIGHT LH
FRONT TURN SIGNAL
F1
LIGHT RH
FRONT TURN SIGNAL
F2
FUSIBLE
W- B
LINK 2 A 1 A
W- B
T5 A , T6 B
1 1
TRAILER SOCKET
(Turn Signal
2 B 1 B Light)
A A
J2 2 2 J7
G- B
G- Y
JUNCTION JUNCTION
CONNECTOR 2 2 CONNECTOR
A R8 R9 A
REAR TURN REAR TURN
SIGNAL SIGNAL
W- B
W- B
LIGHT LH LIGHT RH
W- B
W- B
[REAR COMB. [REAR COMB.
LIGHT LH] 5 5 LIGHT RH]
W- B
W- B
BATTERY
W- B
IE Right ID Left kick EB Front side of BG Lower back EA Front side of ID Left kick
kick panel left fender panel center right fender panel
panel

Power Front Wiper and Washer Rear Wiper and Washer

Source
1 2 3 4
ACC
C15
B 4 AM1 IG1 2 B- Y REAR WIPER AND WASHER SW
[COMB SW]
ST1 1
WR CIR +1R EW
20A WPER
WASHER2
6 EA2 I12 F11
IGNITION SW FUSE BLOCK OFF
B
INT
2 ON
C15 L- B
L
2 WASHER1
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SW
[COMB. SW] L L L
2 2 10 1 16
L- B
LG
WIPER SW
L
50A AM1
+B +2 +1 +S INT1 INT2 B1 4 EA4
L- O
2 ID1 6 ID1 12 ID1
WASHER SW
OFF D11
L- B
EW W
LG
DIODE
L
1 INT (Rear Washer)
OFF 2 L- B 1 2 L- O
2 LO W2 1 BR2 2 BR1 5 BR1
ON M WASHER
L- B
HI MOTOR
LG
L
W
L- B
W1
2 6 BS1 WASHER CHANGE 5 BS1 4 BS1
VALVE
L- G
L- B
L
3 INTERMITTENT WIPER RELAY 5 EA4
4 BT1 L 1 2 L- O 5 BT1 6 BT1
L- B
4 EW +2 +1 +B +S W
W- B
L- B
L- G
L- B
L
R20
2 16 13 7 18 4 8 4 6
REAR WIPER RELAY
L- B
L 1
1 LS C1
+B
B- L
D6
DIODE
W- B
L- Y
L- R
LG
L
(Front Washer)
1 2
L- W
L
FL AM1 1. 25B
F6 L
FUSIBLE LINK
+S LM
L
2 3
L- R
2 3 6 5
L- W A
MOTOR
FRONT WIPER
F3
+2 +1 +B +S J7
3 1 4 JUNCTION
A M CONNECTOR
J7 +1 +B S A
BATTERY JUNCTION E
CONNECTOR
A 1
W- B
2 1 4
A A W- B 2 W- B W- B W- B
M BT2 BS2 BR1
W- B
E
W- B
W- B
J8
JUNCTION R19
CONNECTOR REAR WIPER
Left kick ID IE Right kick MOTOR Under the center BF ID Left kick panel
panel panel console box
K
Power Electronically Controlled Transmission and A/T Indicator

Source
1 2 3 4
B- Y Y
ACC A
B- R FUSIBLE LINK
B- Y
B- Y
B 4 AM1 IG1 2 B- Y Y
1 1 1 B
F6 A ,F8 C F7 B GRAY
ST1 1 B- W
15A ECU- IG
10A GAUGE
P- B
7. 5A IGN
1 C
F11
FUSE BLOCK 1
W- R 11 AM2 IG2 6 B- R G- W
J4 D
JUNCTION
2 3 3 CONNECTOR O
I12 E
B B
B- W
Y Y
JUNCTION CONNECTOR
J1
IGNITION SW
Y
6 EA2 3 EA2 R
R- B
R- Y A F
A Y
B
JUNCTION CONNECTOR
J6
P- B
2 2 2 2 1

A 6 11
B Y W 2 5 BR O
ID3 ID3 IH2
B- W
B- L
2 2 3 2 2nd
B 15 16
50A AM1
PWR
15A EFI
B- W B- W 3 6 P- B P- B P- B
EFI MAIN RELAY 7 EA2 ID2 ID2
E9
1 4 ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED
G- W
P- B
R- B
TRANSMISSION PATTERN
O
1 1
SELECT SW
2 2
R
2 2 1 22
Y- R Y- R Y
EB1 IH1 E4 A ,E5 C ,E6 B ,E7 D
W- R
W
12 D 3 D 22 D 1 D ENGINE CONTROL MODULE 3 A 20 D 17 D 16 D 15 D

+B MRLY NSW IGSW HOLD PWR L 2 R
3 SP2+ SP2- S1 S2 SL OD1 STP L4 THG THW OIL E2 IDL VTA VCC SPD EO3 EO2 EO1 E1 OD2 HI TFN
2 B 8 B 10 A 9 A 8 A 18 D 14 D 9 D 19 A 4 C 12 C 9 C 11 C 10 C 1 C 8 D 16 A 26 A 13 A 24 A 19 D 18 A 21 D
R- Y
4
V- G
G- O
Y- G
R- L
P- L
BR
BR
BR
V
G
R- Y
R- Y
2
R- W
H
B- L
5 EC2 4 EC2 1 EC2 2 EC2 3 EC2
BR
P- L
ECU<11- 2>
Control
Cruise
From
ECU<11- 2>
To Cruise Control
System<2- 7>
See Engine Control
System<2- 8>
See Engine Control
System<2- 8>
See Engine Control
FUSIBLE LINK
F6
1 A 1 B 1 C I
TRANSMISSION SOLENOID
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED
E2
See Engine Control System
P- L
V- G
R- Y
R- L
BR
<2- 6><2- 7>

V
R
A ,F7
FL AM2 0. 3P
FL AM1 1. 25B
FL MAIN 2. 0L
(Electronically
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
V2
Controlled Transmission)
22 ID2
1 2 3
NO. 1
NO. 2
NO. 3
B ,F8
P- L
BR- B
2
BR
C
2 O4
O/D MAIN SW
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE
BATTERY 4
E 4 A DARK GRAY E 5 C DARK GRAY E 6 B DARK GRAY E 7 D DARK GRAY
W- B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Front side of EB Air intake EC BF Under the center
left fender 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 chamber console box

Electronically Controlled Transmission and A/T Indicator Back−Up Light

5 6 7 8
6
Y Y P1 R- B
A IH1 A/T INDICATOR SW
4 [PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SW]
Y B
B
19 ID2
P- B
C
P R N D 2 L
G- W
R- B
D 7 8 10 9 2 3
R- W
G- R
R- B
B- O
R- L
O
O
E
R- B 6 IH2 7 IH1 5 IH2 4 IH2 3 IH2 2 IH2 14 BQ1

F
R- W
G- W
R- B
B- O
R- L
O
G- W
R- B
O
R- B R- B
R- B
R- L B- O
G- W
R- W
R- B
B- O
R- L
P- B
R- L
3
O
Y
T4
8 C 9 D 13 D 3 D 4 D 5 D 7 D 10 D 11 D TRAILER SOCKET
(Tail and Stop Light)
2 1
G- W
G
2nd STRT
R- B
O/D OFF
A/T P
PWR
R- B
P
L
D28
DIODE
B- O
(Neutral Detection)
SW<17- 3>
From Stop Light
<4- 3>
From ” TAIL” Fuse
Y- G 2 1
G
12
R- W
H IH2
[REAR COMB LIGHT RH]

BACK- UP LIGHT RH
R9
[REAR COMB. LIGHT LH]
BACK- UP LIGHT LH
R8
P- L 1 1
I
7 C 12 D 8 D 6 D
C12 D , C13 C
<11- 2>
To Cruise Contorol ECU
COMBINATION METER
W- B
Y- L
5 5
R- W
A
J7
P- L JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
A
W- B
W- B
COMBINATION METER
W- B
C12 D BROWN C13 C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ID Left kick panel BG Lower back panel center
K

Power ABS
Source
1 2 3 4
W
B- Y B- Y ABS ECU
B- Y
ACC
W
A 6 A GRAY A 7 B GRAY A 4 A BLACK A 5 B GRAY A12 A DARK GRAY
1 1 1
4 AM1 IG1 2 ABS RELAY ABS ACTUATOR
W
15A ECU- IG
10A GAUGE
10A ECU- B
ST1 B- W 1 2 1 2 3 F11
1 2 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 3 FUSE
3 4
B
4 5 6
B- W
3 4 BLOCK 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16
4 5 6
I12
IGNITION SW
3 EA3 6 EA2 20 3 2 3
B- W 2 EA3 1 EA3 R- L R- L
B-W
Y
IH1
B- W
B- W
B
D1
CONNECTOR
JUNCTION
J1
A6 A ,A7 B A4 A ,A5 B DATA LINK A B
2 2 15
1 A ABS RELAY 2 B 4 B ABS ACTUATOR CONNECTOR 1 23 B B- W
ID2
6 A22
GND +BM +BS W WB

2 2
B- W
J6
(*1)
A B ABS
B JUNCTION DECELERATION
Y
50A AM1
60A ABS
M TS TC WA CONNECTOR 4 SENSOR
[COMB. METER]
ABS WARNING LIGHT
C10
16 11 22 IG
GR- R
BS SFR SFL SRR AST MT BM GND 5
B- Y
O
4 A 1 B 4 B 3 B 2 B 5 B 3 A 1 A GS1 GS2 GST GND
1 1
BM MR R- SR BS 3 2 1 6
W- B
B- W
B- R
Y- B
Y- R
13 IH1 11 IH1 23 IH1
Y
2 2 2 A 4 A 3 A 1 B 5 B
B- L
L- W
L- R
L- Y
LG
W
G- B
G- Y
L
W
G
W- B
B- R O 14 ID3 13 ID3 12 ID3
GR- R
W
B- Y
W- B
Y- B
Y- R
2
Y
3 23 B 24 B 11 B 1 B 13 B 26 B 18 B 6 B 15 A 5 B 13 A 25 B 12 B 12 A 3 A 10 A
MR R- SR SFR SFL SRR AST MT TS TC W BAT +B GS1 GS2 GST
4
GND1 GND2 FL+ FL- FSS FR+ FR- RL- RL+ RSS RR- RR+ EXI STP PKB
2 B 15 B 9 B 22 B 10 B 16 B 3 B 1 A 9 A 7 A 16 A 8 A A12 A , A13 B 19 B 6 A 14 A
2
BR- B
G- W
R- B
P- B
ABS ECU
BR
B- L
BR
BR
G
R
L
1 B 1 A
B
V
2 ID3 3 ID3 11 ID3 4 ID3 5 ID3

FUSIBLE LINK
F6
<20- 1>
Indicator SW
To Center Diff. Lock
<17- 3>
From Stop Light SW
SW<22- 6>
Brake Fluid Level Warning
To Parking Brake SW and
FL AM1 1 25B
FL MAIN 2. 0L
A ,F8
G
R
L
2 Bd1 4 Bd1 1 Bd1 3 Bd1
B
5 BQ2 4 BQ2 6 BQ2 2 BQ2 1 BQ2

(SHIELDED)
W
L
GR
(SHIELDED)
W- B
BR
W
B
FUSIBLE LINK
ABS ECU
F6 A ,F8 B 4 Bh1 3 Bh1 5 Bh1 2 Bh1 1 Bh1
(SHIELDED) (SHIELDED) A13 B DARK GRAY
W- B
Y- G
W
BATTERY
L
2 1 1 2
1 Bf1 2 Bf1 1 Bg1 2 Bg1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
A23 A24
ABS SPEED SENSOR ABS SPEED SENSOR 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
W
W
B
B
FRONT LH FRONT RH
1 2 1 2
Left kick ID IE Right kick Under the center BF
panel panel A25 A26 console box
ABS SPEED SENSOR ABS SPEED SENSOR
REAR LH REAR RH

K
4
STP-
From Stop Light SW G- W W- B

L-
16
26
<17- 3>
D1
W- B
DATA LINK
CRUISE CONTROL
[STOP LIGHT SW]
CONNECTOR 1
B- Y B- Y
11 IH1
TC
Tc
11
STOP SW
S13
FUSE BLOCK
To Speedometer
SPD
L- W R R- G
L
[Comb. Meter]
20
10
<22- 5>
F11
Cruise Control
BATT
W B- R L
MO
1
15
12
10A ECU- B
CONNECTOR
L- R
MC
C10
M
JUNCTION
3
11
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR LIGHT
[COMB METER]
J1
VR1
Y Y G- Y Y
CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Pi

A
23
1
10A GAUGE
B- Y
VR2
Y- G
24
2
VR3
B- Y B- W B- W Y- L
B
C4
B
B
1
14
25
3
15A ECU- IG
J6
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
From Engine
GND
G- O BR
OD
Control Module
9
13
<9- 2>
Left kick panel

BR
To Throttle
CCS
G- W G- W B- G
19 IH1
IDL
2
Position
21
18
5
CCS
Sensor<2- 7>
B- Y
RESUME/
ACCEL
EP
BR BR
CRUISE CONTROL ECU
ID
20
To Electronically SET/
ECT
R- Y G- R
15 IH2
Controlled COAST
CRUISE CONTROL SW
22
Transmission
Solenoid<9- 2>
CANCEL
[COMB. SW]
C17
CMS
MAIN
CMS
B- O Y- R
C15
From Park/Neutral
D
2
19
15
Position SW<9- 7>
IG1 2
ACC
,F8 B
ST1
1
FUSIBLE LINK
IGNITION SW
F6 A
Source
I12
Power
4 AM1
BATTERY
1
F6 A ,F8 B
B
50A AM1 FUSIBLE LINK
6 EA2
B W B- L
1 A
2
2
2
4
FL AM1 1. 25B
3 EA3
W W
1 B
FL MAIN 2. 0L
DOWN G- Y
REAR VERTICAL
P22
POWER SEAT MOTOR
M
(Passenger’ s Seat Rear

Vertical Control)
1
R- Y
2
UP
4
POWER SEAT CONTROL SW(Passenger’ s Seat)
DOWN G- B
FRONT VERTICAL
11
P21
POWER SEAT MOTOR
M
(Passenger’ s Seat Front

Vertical Control)
2
R- B
12
UP
REAR G- L
7
RECLINING
P23
POWER SEAT MOTOR
M
(Passenger’ s Seat
Reclining Control)
1
R- L
4
P15
FRONT
REAR G
8
P24
SLIDE
POWER SEAT MOTOR

M
9
(Passenger’ s Seat
Slide Control)
1
R
L- B L- B
5
1 Bi1
6 II2
FRONT
10
W- B W- B
3 Bi1
3
Power Seat
BM1
3
Under the center


console box
W- B
W- B W- B
3 Bc1
BF
REAR
LUMBAR SUPPORT
R- W
1
2
P17
POWER SEAT MOTOR
M
9
(Driver’ s Seat Lumbar
Support Control)
1
G
3
FRONT
DOWN G- Y
REAR VERTICAL
2
P18
POWER SEAT MOTOR
M
(Driver’ s Seat Rear
POWER SEAT CONTROL SW(Driver’ s Seat)

2
Vertical Control)
1
R- Y
2
UP
DOWN G- B
FRONT VERTICAL
11
1
P16
POWER SEAT MOTOR
M
(Driver’ s Seat Front
Vertical Control)
2
R- B
12
UP
REAR G- L
7
RECLINING
P14
1
P19
POWER SEAT MOTOR
M
(Driver’ s Seat
Reclining Control)
2
R- L
4
FRONT
REAR G
FUSE BLOCK
2
P20
SLIDE
POWER SEAT MOTOR
M
F11
(Driver’ s Seat
Slide Control)
1
R
L L L- B L- B
1 Bc1
5
10 ID2
1
FRONT
3
10
30A FL POWER
Source
Power
BATTERY
F6
50A AM1 FUSIBLE LINK
6 EA2
B B W B- L
2
2
1
FL AM1 1. 25B
Power Source Power Window

1 2 3 4
LB
B
B
<14- 2>
Control Relay
From Door Lock
30A FL POWER
6 EA2
F11
FUSE
BLOCK
B
2
1
L- B L- B L- B
2 4 BJ1
L- B
P6
7 8
G- O
POWER WINDOW MASTER SW

L
50A
AM1 BW BW1
FRONT LH FRONT RH REAR RH REAR LH
1 1
1
3 4
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
UP
UP
UP
UP
2
POWER
L- B
RELAY +
W
-
1 2
2
+
1 1 -
3 WINDOW
LOCK
SW
LOCK
4
W- B
E1 E FLU FLD NORMAL FRU FRD RRU RRD RLU RLD

2
2 1 6 13 12 5 11 14 10 9
B- Y
R- Y
B- L
R- L
L- B
W- B
W- B
R- G
B- G
A 12 BJ1 15 BJ1 16 BJ1 17 BJ1
J2
B- L
JUNCTION
R- Y
B- Y
B- L
R- L
CONNECTOR
A
L- B
L- B
L- B
1
W- B
L- B
FL AM1 1. 25B
2 BJ1 5 BJ1 2 II1 1 II1 3 II1 5 ID1 11 ID1 1 ID1
F6
B- O
R- G
R- Y
B- L
R- L
L- B
B- Y
L- B
FUSIBLE LINK
B
11 BJ1
2 BK1 5 BK1 1 BK1 2 BP1 1 BP1 3 BP1 2 BN1 1 BN1 3 BN1
R- G
B- O
L- B L- B L- B
B- L
R- L
B- L
R- L
FRONT RH
POWER WINDOW SW
P11
REAR RH
POWER WINDOW SW
P13
REAR LH
POWER WINDOW SW
P12
2 3 5 2 3 5 2 3 5
W- B
W- B
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
UP
UP
UP
BATTERY
1 4 1 4 1 4
W- B
W- B
R
B
3 1 3 1 2 1 2 1
M M M M
IE Right ID Left kick
kick panel P7 P8 P10 P9
panel POWER WINDOW MOTOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR
FRONT LH FRONT RH REAR RH REAR LH
K
B7
BACK DOOR
LOCK MOTOR
3 BR2
1 BS1
3 BS1
4 BR2
3 BT1
1 BT1
L- R L- R L- R L- W L- W L- W
M
2
L- W
D26
DOOR LOCK
MOTOR REAR LH
4
7 BN1
8 BN1
L- R L- R L- R L- W L- W
M
2
D27
L- W
L- R
DOOR LOCK
MOTOR REAR RH
7 BP1
8 BP1
L- R L- W
M
2
4
DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY
L- W
L- R
ID1
12
II1
8
ID1
D25
11
II1
7
DOOR LOCK MOTOR AND

L- W
L- W
DOOR UNLOCK
Right kick panel
L- R
L- R
DETECTION SW FRONT RH
D22
3 BK1
4 BK1
L- R L- R L- R L- W L- W L- W
M
2
4
L- R
LSWP
PCTY
12 BK1
11 BK1
R- G R- L L- O L- O L- O W- B W- B W- B
5 BJ2
2 BJ2
To Door Courtesy SW
IE
A
A
14
Front RH<6- 2>

Door Lock Control
W- B
CONNECTOR
JUNCTION
3
BJ1
13
J8
ACT+
L- W
L- W
4
D24

DOOR LOCK MOTOR AND
L- R
DOOR UNLOCK
DCTY
3 BJ1
To Door Courtesy SW R- B R- G DETECTION SW FRONT LH

2
Front LH<6- 3>

ACT-
14 BJ1
L- R L- R L- W L- W
M
3
4
LSWD
LG W- B
6
3
W- B
E
16
D23
To Unlock Warning SW
KSW
R- B R- B
4 BJ1
DOOR LOCK
[Ignition SW] CONTROL SW RH
7
<17- 2>
20 BK1
L- B LOCK
3
W- B W- B
4
18 BK1
L- Y
UNLOCK
W- B
W- B
L- Y
D21
DOOR KEY
2
RLY
G- O G- O
6 BJ2
To POWER Relay L- B LOCK AND
L- Y
UNLOCK SW RH
15
<13- 1><15- 2>

UNLOCK
3
17 BK1
G- R
G- R
LOCK
1
F11
FUSE BLOCK
Left kick panel

BJ1
BJ2
BJ2
19
7
L L
20 BJ1
D20
B
DOOR KEY LOCK AND
3
8
30A UNLOCK SW LH
FL POWER
UL2
G- Y UNLOCK
B
2
CONNECTOR
G- R
W- B W- B W- B
11 BJ1
ID
JUNCTION
3
G- R G- R
L2
LOCK
12
1
J1
10A GAUGE P6
L- B
L- Y
Y Y
DOOR LOCK CONTROL SW LH
W- B
A
A
1
3
B- Y
[POWER WINDOW
MASTER SW]
UL1
L- Y L- Y UNLOCK
BJ2
IG1 2
11
3
8
ACC
ST1
1
1
Y L- B L- B
L1
IG
Source
LOCK
IGNITION SW
10
4
Power
4 AM1
I12
AM1
F6
50A
FUSIBLE LINK BATTERY
B
FL AM1 1. 25B
6 EA2
B B B W B- L
2
2
1
Power Source Moon Roof Horn

1 2 3 4
B 2
3
1
6 EA2
30A FL POWER
15A
B
F11 HAZ- HORN

FUSE
2 BLOCK
2
W
2
4 2
G- O From Door Lock
50A
AM1
G- O
L
1 1 1
2
2 3 4
POWER 2
W
RELAY
HORN
2 2 1 2 RELAY
M2
MOON ROOF CONTROL RELAY
3 1 3
1 1
2
2 2
L- B
G- W
G- R
IG LS. 1 LS. 2 - + GND UP DOWN OPEN CLOSE
6 8 9 5 4 11 3 7 1 2
2
5 IE1
G- W
R- W
G- Y
R- Y
R- L
P
1 EA1
B- L
L- B
W- B
1 4 6 3 5 2 3 6 G- W
1
W- B
NO. 1
NO. 2
1 1
G- R
M4
CLOSE
DOWN
H7 H8
OPEN
UP
FL AM1 1. 25B
MOON ROOF M HORN LH HORN RH

LIMIT SW (High) (Low)
F6 AND MOTOR
FUSIBLE LINK
5 2 4 M3
10
W- B
MOON ROOF
CONTROL SW
W- B W- B W- B C14
HORN SW
A [COMB. SW]
J2 6
A W- B W- B
JUNCTION IE1
CONNECTOR
A
W- B
W- B
BATTERY
W- B
ID Left kick panel IE Right kick panel
K
Power Source Rear Heater Cigarette Clock

Lighter
1 2 3 4
W W
W W
ACC 3 L- R 1 2
4 AM1 IG1 2 B- Y
2 1
ST1
B- Y
B- Y
W
1 1 TAIL 10A
RELAY DOME
3 EA3 6 EA2 I12
IGNITION SW FUSIBLE LINK
20A REAR- HTR

3 1
10A GAUGE
3
F6 A ,F8 B
W
F11
FUSE BLOCK 1 1 2
L- R
2 1

1 1
2
2 3
L- Y
15A TAIL
15A CIG
2
Y
L- W L- W
System<4- 2
See Taillight
50A II2 F11
AM1 B FUSE BLOCK
J4
JUNCTION
1 CONNECTOR 2 2
B
GR
G
2
Y
R4 3 EA1
5
L- W
L- W
REAR HEATER SW
W
A A
J3 J4
JUNCTION JUNCTION
2 2 CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
6 4
A A
HI
LO
2 R15 3
GR
3 REAR HEATER
LO
HI
RELAY
L- Y
G
GR GR
4 2 1
W- B
2
2 4 2
4 2 1 C6
B- L
W
CIGARETTE C9
L- B
L- Y
LIGHTER CLOCK
1 B 1 A 1
1 3
W- B
FL AM1 1. 25B
FL MAIN 2. 0L
1 II2 5 II2
L
W- B
F6 A ,F8 B
W- B
W- B
FUSIBLE LINK
L- Y
L- B
L- Y
3 BM1
3 2 B B
1 J7 J3
M
JUNCTION JUNCTION
A CONNECTOR A CONNECTOR
A W- B J8
R14 JUNCTION
W- B
REAR HEATER CONNECTOR

A A
BATTERY
W- B
W- B
BF Under the center ID Left kick panel IE Right kick panel
console box

Power Source Unlock and Seat Belt Warning Stop Light Auto Antenna
1 2 3 4
W
*1 : w/ Power Seat
*2 : w/o Power Seat
L- R
W
B- Y
ACC 3 L- R
B- Y
2
B 4 AM1 IG1 2 B- Y 1 1
W
10A GAUGE
ST1 1
10A STOP
15A CIG
F11 F11 F11
3 EA3 6 EA2 FUSE BLOCK FUSE BLOCK FUSE BLOCK
10A
I12 DOME
IGNITION SW
3 2 2
W
G- O
FUSIBLE LINK
2 2
F6 A , F8 B 2
GR
L- Y
Y
2
1
CONNECTOR
JUNCTION
J3
50A 3 EA1 S13 A
AM1 C10 STOP LIGHT SW
SEAT BELT WARNING
L- Y
1 LIGHT[COMB. METER] A
A B
CONNECTOR
JUNCTION
J3
10 5 A J1 1 To Engine Control
G- W
G Y
2 JUNCTION Module <2-7>
GR
CONNECTOR To ABS ECU<10-4>
G- W To Cruise Control
A B
L- Y
S3
G- W
ECU<11-4>
W
SEAT BELT
WARNING RELAY 5 9
2 2 IG B 2 ID2 3 IF1
A 21
G- W
3
GR
1 AUTO ANTENNA
2 G- W G- W G- W
BKL CTY L- SW E BR1 4 CONTROL SW
G- W
2
4 4 8 7 1
G 3 BS2
G
ECU<3- 2>
To Shift Lock
DOWN
W- B
UP
R- B
R- B
3 BQ1
G- W
B- L
W
W- B
G- W
14 ID2
[IGNITION SW]
UNLOCK WARNING SW
I12
A To TRAILER
R- B
1 B 1 A 10 J2 G- W SOCKET 1
JUNCTION 5 3
STOP LIGHT
HIGH MOUNTED
H12
(Tail and
G
L-Y
FUSIBLE LINK
F6
CONNECTOR
L
Stop Light)
FL AM1 1. 25B
FL MAIN 2. 0L
A <9- 7> 4 IF1

2 Bc1 (*1) G- W
A ,F8
2 Bj1 (*2) G- W
Front LH<6- 3>
To Door Courtesy SW

From Door Lock
9 12 IF1 13 IF1
2
W- B
G
L-Y
B
W- B
W- B
G- W
W- B
L
1
1 BS2 1
[REAR COMB.
STOP LIGHT LH
R8
[REAR COMB.
STOP LIGHT RH
R9
LIGHT LH]
LIGHT RH]
B8 A 6 6
BUCKLE J7 A
1 2
CONNECTOR
JUNCTION
J8
SW LH JUNCTION
W- B
M
CONNECTOR
W- B
A8
W- B
2 A
W- B
AUTO ANTENNA A
W- B
5 5 4 BR1
MOTOR
BATTERY 3 Bc1 (*1)
W- B
3 Bj1 (*2) Right kick

IE
W- B
W- B W- B
W- B
panel
Under the center BF Left kick panel ID IE Right kick BG Lower back BF Under the center
console box panel panel center console box
K
Power Source Rear Window Defogger Remote Control Mirror

1 2 3 4
W
ACC 3 L- R L- R
4 AM1 IG1 2 B- Y
W
F11
ST1 1 FUSE BLOCK 1 1
W
15A CIG
I12 10A 20A F11
IGNITION SW GAUGE DEFOG FUSE BLOCK
3 EA3 6 EA2
3 3 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 2

B
L- O
Y
R17 A BLACK R18 B BLACK
2

A A Y
GR
1 1
Y
2
J1 1 1
JUNCTION
50A CONNECTOR
B 1 4
AM1 J4 R6
JUNCTION DEFOG 1 REMOTE CONTROL MIRROR SW
CONNECTOR
1 B RELAY B
OPERATION SW
B
3 2
2
/UP
LEFT
/DOWN
RIGHT
LEFT
RIGHT
UP
DOWN
1 1
1 A
W
L- Y
R17 A , R18 B
W
SELECT SW
17 ID2 REAR WINDOW
2 FUSIBLE LINK L- O DEFOGGER
1 B LH RH LH RH
L- Y
F6 A ,F8 B
3 B E HL HR VL VR M+
2 IF1 11 IF1 4 9 2 10 6 3
1
2 BR2 1 BX1
W
4
G
L- O
Y
Y
L- Y
2
W- B
2 IG
B- L
D 6
W- B
2 BS1
G- R
R5
REAR WINDOW 2 BT2
1 B 1 A
L- G
DEFOGGER SW
W- B
Y- R
FL AM1 1. 25B
FL MAIN 2. 0L
W
G
Y
E 2 BT1 1 BS2
F6 A ,F8 B
3
W- B
FUSIBLE LINK
W- B
A
B
J2 9 BJ1 6 BJ1 10 BJ1 9 BK1 6 BK1 10 BK1

JUNCTION
4 BR1 CONNECTOR
4 IF1
W
A
G
Y
Y
1 BU1
1 2 3 1 2 3
W- B
W- B
B
A
J8
JUNCTION M M M M
W- B
W- B
W- B
BATTERY CONNECTOR
A
W- B
R21 R22
Right kick panel IE Under the center BF Left kick panel ID IE Right kick REMOTE CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL
console box panel MIRROR LH MIRROR RH


Power Radio and Player
*1 : Separate Type Amplifer
*2 : Built- In Type Amplifier
Source *3 9 Speaker(w/ CD)
1 2 3 4
W
RADIO AND PLAYER STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER
2
ECU<17- 4>
Antenna
To Auto
ACC 3 L- R R 1 A GRAY R 3 B GRAY S11 A S12 B
1
4 AM1 IG1 2 B- Y
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 5
ST1 1 1 10A 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
B
DOME 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
10A GAUGE
15A CIG
V
F11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
6 EA2 I12 3 J3
IGNITION SW FUSE BLOCK L- Y
JUNCTION
(*1)
2 CONNECTOR B V
3
(*2)
L- Y L- Y B B L- Y
V
3 2 (*1)
B
EA1
GR
(*2)
4 A 8 A
A
3 +B ANT
A GR
Y
(*1)
L- Y
2 A ACC
(*2)
AMP RL- RR- RR+ RL+ FL- FL+ FR- FR+ GND
2
9 A 6 B 3 B 1 B 2 B 6 A 2 A 5 A 1 A 7 A
CONNECTOR
JUNCTION
J3
B R1 A ,R3 B
50A AM1
J4 R2
RADIO AND PLAYER
(*2)
BR
JUNCTION RADIO AND
R- B
(*2)
(*2)
Y
CONNECTOR PLAYER
B 1
R- B R- B
AMP+
1 (* 1) (*1)
10 A 8
R- B
V
ANT
1 +B 3
Y
2 A GR GR B- L 3
A ACC ACC B ACC
(* 1) (*1) (*1)
(*2)
(*2)
(*2)
(*2)
(*2)
(*2)
(*2)
LG
W
L
A 1 4
R- B R- B LG- R 4
4 B AMP+ +B B +B
W
(* 1) (*1) (*1)
C16
COOLING FAN M 12
Y Y Y
(Radio and Player) A RL- (SHIELDED)
R- B
(*3)
(*3)
GR
(*1) (*1)
1
2 2 5 5
B B B B 5
(*3)
Y
A RL+ MUTE B MUTE

(* 3) (*1) (*1)
2 3
11 6
6
W- B
16 II1 15 II1 8 II2 14 II1 W G

A RR- FL+ B FL+
(*1) (*1)
4 4 7
R- B
(*3)
(*3)
(*3)
(*3)
GR
R L 7
Y
W
A RR+ FR+ B FR+
(*1) (*1)
2 A 9 3 6 2
R
J7 8 12
V R 12
JUNCTION +B W 6 AMP+ RL- RL+ A FL- S GND B S GND
WOOFER AMPLIFIER 19 ID1 20 ID1 17 II1 18 II1 (*1) (*1)
CONNECTOR
B- L
A 3 13
GND WF- WF+ RR- RR+ P P W 13
A FL+ BEEP B BEEP
W
R
Y
7 10 4 5 1 (*1) (*1)
1 R(*3) 7 14
L Y 14
LG- R
LG- B
W- B
W- B
(*3)
(*3)
(*3)
W(*3) W A FR- RL+ B RL+

FL AM1 1. 25B
(* 1) (*1)
F6 2 15
LG LG BR 15
(*3)
(*3)
(*3)
(*3)
(*3)
W
L
FUSIBLE LINK A FR+ RR+ B RR+
(*1) (*1)
Y
B
(*3)
(*3)
Y
(*3)
LG
LG
W- B
W- B
3 BM1 5 BN1 6 BN1 5 BP1 6 BP1
W
11
R
11
2 1 6 BR1 2 1 7 BR1 1 BW1 2 1 2 BW1 8 BJ1 2 1 7 BJ1 8 BK1 2 1 7 BK1 GNDGND B GND
W- B
(*3)
9 A S11 A , S12 B
W5 R12 R13 F9 F10
(* 3)
(* 3)
(* 3)
(* 3)
(* 3)
W
STEREO COMPONENT
R
Y
LG(*3)
LG(*3)
WOOFER(SPEAKER) REAR DOOR REAR DOOR FRONT SPEAKER FRONT SPEAKER
(*3)
AMPLIFIER
(*1)
BR
BATTERY SPEAKER LH SPEAKER RH LH RH BR
(*2)
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
Left kick ID BF Under the center IE Right kick
panel console box R23 R24 F14 F15 panel
ROOF SPEAKER ROOF SPEAKER FRONT DOOR FRONT DOOR
LH RH SPEAKER LH SPEAKER RH
K
Power Source Center Differential Lock

1 2 3 4
ACC
COMBINATION METER
B 4 AM1 IG1 2 B- Y
C10 A GRAY C11 B BLUE C13 C
ST1
B- Y
B- Y
1 1
I12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
10A GAUGE
6 EA2 IGNITION SW
30A DIFF
F11
FUSE BLOCK
B
2
3 2
L- B
2
Y
2
Y B B Y Y 7 10 B

50A IF1
AM1 A Y J4
S10
[PARK/NEUTRAL
A/T INDICATOR SW
P1
B
POSITION SW]
J1 4 JUNCTION
SHORT PIN
Y
JUNCTION CONNECTOR
1 (Center Diff. Lock)
CONNECTOR
A
L- B
9 IF1
2 6 IH1
7
R- L
Y
W
6 IH2
B
3 EC1
Y
R- L
9 3
24
Y
3 5 A 8 C B- L 7
2 IH1
POSITION SW
TRANSFER L4
T2
B- L
CENTER
A/T P
4 DIFE. LOCK
2 B C10 A , C11 B , C13 C 7 C

2
1
P- B
Module<2- 7>
To Engine Control
B- L
B- L
COMBINATION METER
Y- L
B- L
C5
1 CENTER DIFF. LOCK
P- B
3 IH1 D28 4 EC1 CONTROL RELAY

DIODE
Y- B
(Neutral Detection)
1
16 2
1 EC1 Y- G Y- G
IH2
FL AM1 1. 25B
2
From Diff. Lock ECU<21- 3>
From ABS ECU<10- 4>
F6 2 EC1
Y- B
FUSIBLE LINK
INDICATOR SW
CENTER DIFF. LOCK
C2
Y- G
G- R
G- B
G- Y
4 10 1 5
POSITION SW
TRANSFER NEUTRAL
T3
W- B
G
2
10 IH1 16 IH1 8 IH1 9 IH1
G- R
G- B
G- Y
A
G
1 J2
W- B
1 JUNCTION
8 EC1 12 EC1 7 EC1 11 EC1 CONNECTOR
W- B W- B
A
W- B
W- B
G- R
G- B
G- Y
G
2 5 3 6
10 EC1
BATTERY
W- B
W- B
W- B
W- B 4
M
Air intake chamber C1 Left kick Right
EC CENTER DIFF. LOCK ID IE
panel kick
CONTROL MOTOR panel

Power Source Front/Rear Differential Lock

1 2 3 4
ACC COMBINATION METER
B 4 AM1 IG1 2 B- Y C10 A GRAY C13 C

ST1
B- Y
B- Y
1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
I12
10A GAUGE
6 EA2 IGNITION SW
30A DIFF
F11
FUSE BLOCK
B
J1
2 JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
2 3 Y A A Y
L- B
2
L- B
C10 A , C13 C
50A 4 COMBINATION METER 5 A
AM1
FRONT/REAR
REAR
D4 REAR FRONT
1 L- B DIFF. LOCK DIFF. DIFF.
CONTROL SW LOCK LOCK
2
1 2 10 C 9 C
B- G
R- B
W
G- R
D5
W
8 12 6 DIFF. LOCK ECU
IG R RF 9 G- R
FLP
2
2 W
RLP
G- R
SPD GND M4 M3 REL4 REL3 M2 M1 REL2 REL1 4WD
3
W
G- O
G- B
G- Y
4 13 5 7 14 16 1 3 11 10 15
G
L- R
L- B
L- Y
P- B
W- B
L- W
4 10 ID1 3 ID1 14 ID1 9 ID1 13 ID1 5 Bb1
G- O
G- B
G- Y
W
2
G
2 Bb1 1 Bb1 4 Bb1 3 Bb1
<22- 5>
[Comb. Meter]
To Speedometer
Indicator SW<20- 1
To Center Diff. Lock
1 BQ1 2 BQ1 5 BQ1 6 BQ1 12 BQ1
L- G
B- L
L- B
L- Y
L
G- B
G- Y
G- L
Y- W
G
G- R
2 3 5 6 2 Bh2 1 Bh2 4 Bh2 3 Bh2
1
5 Bh2
G- B
G- Y
G- L
FL AM1 1. 25B
G
M 2 3 5 6
Y- W
POSITION SW
FRONT DIFF. LOCK
F13
F6
POSITION SW
REAR DIFF. LOCK
R11
FUSIBLE LINK 2 2
F12 4 M
W- B
FRONT DIFF. LOCK

CONTROL MOTOR
W- B
R10
W- B
4 1 1
REAR DIFF. LOCK
CONTROL MOTOR W- B
W- B
6 Bb1
W- B
W- B
W- B
A 6 Bh2
W- B A J8
W- B
BATTERY JUNCTION
CONNECTOR W- B
W- B
IE Right kick panel BG Lower back panel center
K
(C o n t. next page)
Power Source Combination Meter

1 2 3 4
COMBINATION METER
ACC 1
B- Y
6 C10 A GRAY C11 B BLUE C12 D BROWN C13 C
B 4 AM1 IG1 2
10A GAUGE
EA2
ST1
F11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B
FUSE BLOCK
I12
IGNITION SW
2 3
Y Y
50A A
AM1 A

Y
Y A A Y Y
B
1
J1 OIL PRESSURE SENDER
JUNCTION
2 CONNECTOR
O 2 A BLACK
B
J4
W
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR 1
B
2
Y
3
2 6 1
R- G R- G R- O O 3 B GRAY
Ea1 EC1 IH1
4
6 IH1
2 1
R
B- L
R- O
Y
1 Y- R
FL AM1 1. 25B
3 EC1 1 4
F6 3 R- O
FUSIBLE C
LINK
F18
Y
V1 FUEL SENDER
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR [FUEL PUMP]
(Combination Meter)
5
1 Ea1
1 2 2
R R
BR
BO1 D
BR
1
BATTERY Y- R Y- R
BO1 E
4 BO1
Y 3 Ea1
9
BR BR
BR
EC1
Air intake EC BF Under the center

chamber console box

K
(*2)
See Illumination System See Illumination System
2 D
1 D
<5- 2> <5- 2>

*1 : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
N D
*2 A/T Indicator llumination
5 D
7 D
See Electronically R 2 See Electronically

Controlled Controlled Transmission
4 D
10 D
Transmission and
and A/T Indicator
A/T Indicator System<9- 6><9- 7>
8
System<9- 6> P L
3 D
11 D
PWR
See Electoronically Controlled W- B
8 C 13 D
6 D
Transmission and A/T Indicator

System<9- 6> A/T P
See Center Differential See Center Differential
7 C
Lock System<20- 2> Lock System<20- 2>

METER ILLUMINATION
See Illumination
2 C
12 B
See I lumination System<5- 2>

System<5- 2>
SRS
2 A
3 A
See SRS System<4- 4> See SRS System<4- 4>

CHARGE
See Charging
16 C 13 C
7 B
See Charging System<1- 3>

System<1- 3>
DOOR
See Interior Light See Interior Light
15 C
System<6- 2> System<6- 2>

HIGH BEAM
See Headlight
6 C
5 C
See Headlight System<3- 4>

System<3- 4>
FRONT REAR DEFF.
DEFF. LOCK LOCK
See Front/Rear Differential See Front/Rear
9 C
10 C
Differential
Lock System<21- 4>
7
Lock System<21- 4>

SEAT BELT CRUISE
See Unlock and Seat Belt See Cruise Control
10 A
9 A
Warning System<17- 1> System<11- 3>


ABS (*1)
Combination Meter
See ABS System See Engine Control
IE
4 A
6 B
<10- 4> System<2- 3>
Right kick panel

CENTER DEFF.
LOCK WATER TEMP.
See Center Differential BR
2 B
1 A
Lock System<20- 2>

R- W
9 ID2
W- B
W- B
BR
G- R P4
10 B
PARKING BRAKE SW
R- B
B1
BRAKE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
G WARNING SW
2 IH1
R- B R- B W- B W- B W- B
1
ID
8 A
A
W3
R- B
WATER TEMP. A/T OIL TEMP. J2
Left kick panel

From JUNCTION
SENDER
ABS ECU
W- B
CONNECTOR
<10- 4
A
TURN RH
W- B
9 B
1 B
A
See Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning Light TURN LH J7
System<7- 3><7- 4> Y- L JUNCTION
6
8 B
7 A
From Engine CONNECTOR
TACHO Control Module
B <2- 8
1 C 11 B
VOLT
BR BR
(SHIELDED)
1 EA4
3 EY1
BR BR BR
N2
CHECK
RELAY
NOISE FILTER (OIL
BULB
From Park/Neutral B- R
5 B
Position SW<1- 1> PRESSURE SENDER)
BR
2
C10 A , C11 B , C12 D , C13 C
BR
OIL
3 EA4
1 EY1
W W W
6 A
1 A
1 B
(SHIELDED) (SHIELDED) O2 A ,O 3 B
DELAY
OIL LEVEL OIL PRESSURE SENDER
COMBINATION METER
P P W- B
7 IH2
EC
3 B
Air intake chamber

O1
FUEL OIL LEVEL WARNING SW
Y- R
14 C
From Engine
Control FUEL
Module <2-8> R
12 D 11 C
From Diff. Lock
ECU <21-2> L- W 2nd STRT
3 C
from Cruise
5
See Electronically
Transmission and
ID2
ID2
Control
18
5
ECU <11-3>
A/T Indicator
O/D OFF
Controlled
9 D
8 D
System
<9- 6>
4 C
5 A
SPEEDOMETER
R- O
Y- R
R
Y
D
A
E
Power Air Conditioning

Source
4
1 W 2 L- R 3 L- R
A
B- Y
L- R
Y Y
1 1 2 B
ACC Y Y
C
40A FL HEATER
FUSE BLOCK
F11
10A GAUGE
4 AM1 IG1 2 Y
10A A. C
ST1 L- B
D
Y
L
W
E
I12
IGNITION SW B B B L- W
W- G
2 3 1
Y
Y B F
Y
A W
3 EA3 6 EA2
CONNECTOR
JUNCTION
J1
G
J4
JUNCTION A10 L- R
7 A/C SYSTEM AMPLIFIER H
CONNECTOR
B
A Y
B
I
1 1

2
5 3
L- Y 6 1 10 11 5 12 2 9
2 2
W- G
W- B
Y- G
G- R
B- O
Y- R
Y- B
B
50A AM1
HEATER
RELAY
4 1
1 1 1
Y
L- B
1
L- Y
7 5 3 8 S8
2 FUSIBLE LINK SHORT
W- B
L- Y
L- Y
CONNECTOR
W
(Heater)
BLOWER MOTOR
B3
(A/C)
BLOWER MOTOR
B2
F6 A ,F8 B (A/C) W- B
1 1 6 4 2 1 J
2
G- W
G- B
B- Y
G
M M
W- B
1
3
2 2 B4
L- R
BLOWER RESISTOR
B
4 1 4 K
L- R L- R
G- W
2 L
A G- B G- B
W
J2 3 2 M
L- B
B- L
JUNCTION
W- B
W- B
L- R
CONNECTOR N
L- W
Y- G
G- B
L- Y
Y- R
B- Y
G
A
Y
L
1 B 1 A 1 IG1 2 IG1
8 IG1 9 IG1 3 IG1 A
5 4 1 2 3 2 3 1 A
FL AM1 1. 25B
FL MAIN 2. 0L
A
B- W
L- B
B- L
J8
R- L
L- R
L- R
A J7
B
JUNCTION FRESH
WARM JUNCTION
4 2 1 CONNECTOR
A M CONNECTOR
RELAY
BLOWER SPEED CONTROL
B5
5 R- L
COOL RECIRC
F6 A ,F8 B 7 M
W- B
L- R
M2
M1
HI
FUSIBLE LINK A14

4 AIR INLET CONTROL SERVO MOTOR
6
W- B
W- Y
IG1
A15
6 AIR MIX CONTROL SERVO MOTOR
8 R
IG1
HEATER CONTROL SW AND A/C SW
BATTERY 3 10
W- B
W- B W- B H10 A H11 B BLUE

W- B
IG1
W- B
Left kick panel Right kick panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Left kick panel

ID IE ID
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Air Conditioning
5 6 7 8
L−R
A
Y Y A9
B
A/C AMPLIFIER
Y Y
C
12 EA1 3 2 5 6 8 9 4 7
5
R- G
R- G
R- B
Y- L
L- Y
B
Y
W- L
L- B B/L F/D B/L F/D
L- R
D FACE FOOT DEF FACE FOOT DEF
GR
L A16
R- G
E AIR VENT MODE 1
A/C DUAL PRESSURE SW

A2
11 IG2 20 IG2 17 IG2
W- L
W- L
A/C THERMISTOR
A11
L- W CONTROL SERVO MOTOR 2
F
GR- G
Y- R
B- R
TEMP. CUT RELAY

ENGINE COOLANT
E8
W 4 2
G
L- R M 9 IG2
H 6 EA1
1
B
R- B
Position SW<1- 1>
From Park/Neutral
I
6 3 1
P- L
4
L
SHORT CONNECTOR(A/C)
S9
W- B
L- W
R- B
Y- R
L- B
L- R
W
B
L
3 6 7 8 1 5
W- B
1 IG2 10 IG2 2 IG2
1 2 3 4 7
G- R
V- G
LG
9 15 12 14 13 2 4 16 11
B- W
B- W
G- Y
GR- G
GR- R
LG- R
LG- B
W- L
W- R
Y- R
Y- G
R- L
W- B
9 EA1
17 IH2
W- B
Module<2- 8>
To Engine Control
J
B- W
2 EY1
B
K
B- W
G- W
G- Y
L
A/C MAGNETIC CLUTCH

A1
M 1
W- B W- B
N
GR- R
LG- R
LG- B
W- R
W- B
W- B
G- R
W- L
G- B
Y- R
Y- G
V- G
R- L
L- R
LG
Y
V
L
W- B
1 B 3 B 2 B 9 A 1 A 9 B 10 B 13 B 14 A 12 A 7 A 11 B 4 B 17 B 6 B 18 B 8 A 18 A 19 A 16 B
(A/C)
WATER TEMP. SW
W4
1
REC
FRC
REC
FRC
CONNECTOR
JUNCTION
J8
A
TEMP.
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
A 2
FACE B/L FOOT F/D DEF
W- B
W- B
LO M1 M2 HI
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL LEVER BLOWER SW MODE SELECTION SW A/C SW RECIRC/FRESH SW
H10 A , H11 B Right kick Air intake

IE EC
HEATER CONTROL SW AND A/C SW panel chamber
K

1996 Toyota Land Cruiser EWD

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1996 Toyota Land Cruiser EWD

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Brought to you by BirfMark

Brought to you by BirfMark

INDEX Index of the contents of this manual.

HOW TO USE THIS

D ABBREVIATIONS Defines the abbreviations used in this manual.

INDEX Index of the system circuits.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL B

This manual provides information on the electrical circuits installed on vehicles by

B HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

A : System Title J : Indicates the wiring color.

Example: Indicates Relay Block No. 1. BR = Brown LG = Light Green V = Violet

: Indicates the connector to be connected to a part (the G = Green O = Orange W = White

K : Indicates a wiring Splice Point (Codes are “E” for the

G : Indicates the wiring harness and wiring harness

M : Indicates a shielded cable.

B HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

V : CONNECTOR JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS

CODE SEE PAGE GROUND POINT LOCATION

Q : Explains the system outline.

R : Indicates values or explains the function for reference during troubleshooting.

B HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

CONTINUITY AND RESISTANCE CHECK

(c) Use the volt/ohmmeter with high impedance (10 kΩ/V

FINDING A SHORT CIRCUIT

DISCONNECTION OF MALE AND FEMALE

HOW TO REPLACE TERMINAL

For Non-Waterproof Type Connector

For Waterproof Type Connector

4. INSTALL TERMINAL TO CONNECTOR

(b) Push the secondary locking device or terminal retainer

E GLOSSARY OF TERMS AND SYMBOLS

CIRCUIT BREAKER HORN

DIODE IGNITION COIL

DIODE, ZENER LIGHT

PHOTODIODE LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE)

DISTRIBUTOR, IIA METER, ANALOG

Brought to you by BirfMark

RELAY Basically, an electrically SPEAKER

RESISTOR SWITCH, DOUBLE THROW

RESISTOR, TAPPED SWITCH,

SENSOR (Thermistor) SWITCH, WIPER PARK

SENSOR, SPEED TRANSISTOR

SHORT PIN WIRES

2 : R/B No. 2 Front Side of Left Fender

Fuse Block Instrument Panel Left (See Page 19)

G ELECTRICAL WIRING ROUTING

A 1 A/C Magnetic Clutch F 1 Front Turn Signal Light LH

B 1 Brake Fluid Level Warning SW G 1 Generator

I 1 Idle Air Control Valve P 1 Park/Neutral Position SW

G ELECTRICAL WIRING ROUTING

A 9 A/C Amplifier C 11 Combination Meter

C 5 Center Diff. Lock Control Relay E 4 Engine Control Module

F 9 Front Speaker LH L 1 Light Retainer Relay

G ELECTRICAL WIRING ROUTING

M 2 Moon Roof Control Relay

O 4 O/D Main SW R 17 Rear Window Defogger (+)

G ELECTRICAL WIRING ROUTING

B 8 Buckle SW LH P 19 Power Seat Motor (Driver’s Seat Reclining Control)

G ELECTRICAL WIRING ROUTING

: Location of Splice Points

CODE JOINING WIRE HARNESS AND WIRE HARNESS (CONNECTOR LOCATION)

G ELECTRICAL WIRING ROUTING

: Location of Splice Points